GIFT OF 




*k°\ 



Ibeatb'a flDofcern language Series 



GERMAN LESSONS 



BY 

Charles Harris 

Professor of German in Adelbert College of Western 
Reserve University 



D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 
BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO 



^$H 




Copyright, 1892, 

By Charles Harris 

1 D3 



PREFACE. 



This book is intended to give such knowledge of forms as 
will adequately prepare the student to read ordinary German. 
It is expected to lead up to the advanced grammar on the 
one hand and to the study of prose composition on the other. 
As the number of German grammars now before the public is 
great, the author feels constrained to explain why this one has 
been prepared. 

In teaching German, as well as other languages, it is desir- 
able to bring the beginner face to face with the language as 
soon as possible. Here brief lesson-books, which deal only 
with essentials, have certain evident advantages. One of the 
greatest of these is the freedom such books have in the 
arrangement of the facts to be learned, so that what is most 
important for the beginner may be placed first. 

Much time may be saved by the use of a lesson-book. 
Not only does the beginner come sooner to the language it- 
self, but the comparative brevity of the book gives him a sense 
of mastery of the facts needed in elementary work, which 
does not come so readily from larger grammars. This sense 
of mastery is not to be despised, as it is a real impetus and 
aid in future study. The student should begin to read German 
in one of the various excellent Readers or in some easy text 
long before he has gone through the lessons in even so brief 
a book as this. Reading helps to lay firm hold of the gram- 
mar and is a pleasure in itself. It is possible to read simple 
German readily without an extensive knowledge of formal 

331945 



IV PREFACE. 

grammar, for the analogy to English constructions makes much 
of German syntax intelligible without explanation. 

As soon as the beginner is able to write connected German 
sentences, however simple, it is time for him to stop writing 
detached sentences and to take up formal prose composition. 
This has been an additional reason for making this book brief. 

The book lays no claim to completeness. The author 
has tried to make it complete enough to be an introduction 
to German and to serve all the purposes of students who 
have only a year for the study of the language. It is the 
author's belief that advanced grammar can be studied more 
profitably after the completion of a lesson-book; so that to 
the student who does continue his German, as w»ll as to the 
one who does not, the lesson-book is a positive gain. 

Only the test of actual use can decide whether this book 
carries out the principles which have guided in its preparation. 
Whether it is to succeed or fail, the author can at least present 
it to the public as an honest attempt to solve the problem of 
the teaching of elementary German. Other grammars have 
been freely consulted and used. Conversational exercises 
have been omitted, as they can be better prepared by the 
teacher. The author offers no apology for the prosaic charac- 
ter of the sentences in the exercises, as it is due to the 
attempt to keep the vocabulary from swelling beyond its 
proper limits. Matter is given in the appendix which may be 
of service to those who do not subsequently take up a larger 
grammar. , 

CHARLES HARRIS. 
Oberlin College, June, 1892. 

This edition has been revised and conforms to the latest 
official orthography. 

CHARLES HARRIS. 
January, 1906. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE. 

Alphabet . i 

Pronunciation 2 

LESSON 

I. The Definite Article. Present Indicative of feitt . . 9 

II. Words Declined like ber. Present Indicative of Ijabett . 12 

III. The Indefinite Article and Words Declined Like It. 

Preterit of feitt and Ijabett 14 

IV. Weak Conjugation, Simple Tenses . . . . . 17 
V. Strong Conjugation, Simple Tenses. Present and Pre- 
terit of toerbett . . 20 

VI. Compound Tenses of fyabett and of Verbs with fyabett. 

Declension of id) 24 

VII. Compound Tenses of feitt. Declension of bit. Word- 
order .......... 27 

VIII. Compound Tenses of toerbett and Other Verbs with feitt. 

Declension of er, fie, e§ 31 

IX. Strong Declension, Class I. Inverted Order . • . 35 

X. Strong Declension, Class II. Prepositions with Dative 

or Accusative 39 

XI. Strong Declension, Class III. Interrogative Pronouns. 

Substitution of tDO and ba for Pronouns ... 42 
XII. Weak Declension. Compound Nouns. Demonstratives, 46 

XIII. Irregular Declension of Nouns. Foreign Nouns. Proper 

Names. Nouns of Weight and Measure ... 50 

XIV. Strong Declension of Adjectives. Cardinal Numerals . 54 
XV. Weak Declension of Adjectives. Transposed Order . 57 

XVI. Mixed Declension of Adjectives. Relative Pronouns. 

Ordinal Numerals. (£§ tft, e§ gibt .... 61 
XVII. Comparison of Adjectives. Fractionals. Counting Time, 65 
XVIII. Subjunctive of Ijabett. Uses of the Subjunctive. The 

Conditional. Inverted Order after Subordinate Clauses, 69 



VI CONTENTS. 

LESSON. PAGB. 

XIX. Subjunctive of Weak and Strong Verbs. Uses of the 

Subjunctive. Day of the Month . . . . . 74 
XX. Subjunctive of feitt and of Verbs with Jem. Uses of the 
Subjunctive. Verbs in ierett, elit, em. Irregular 

Weak Verbs . 79 

XXI. Inseparable Verbs. Some. 35iel, roetttg, all. Indefi- 
nite Relative itmS 84 

XXII. Separable Verbs. Prefixes, Separable or Inseparable . 88 

XXIII. Reflexive Verbs. 3emanb, niemanb, jebermamt . . 92 

XXIV. Impersonal Verbs. Remarks about some Pronouns and 

Adjectives. Possessive Pronouns 95 

XXV. Passive Voice. Some Uses of the Perfect and Present . 99 

XXVI. Modal Auxiliaries. Infinitive without git. Saffen . . 103 

XXVII. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions .... 107 

XXVIII. Order of Words. Accusative and Genitive of Time. 

Adverbial Genitive ill 

Vocabularies 117 

Appendix 140 

Script Alphabet and Exercises ....... 140 

Nouns 144 

Synopses of Verbal Forms ....... 147 

Strong Verbs 166 

Alphabetical List of Verbs 1 73 

Inseparable Prefixes . . . . . . . .181 

Order of Words 182 

Derivation J 83 

Composition . . . . . ' . . . . .184 

Grimm's Law . . . . . . . . .185 

Syntax . 187 

Summary . 190 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



ALPHABET. 

1. German is usually printed in an alphabet consisting 
of twenty-six letters and having the same origin as our 
own, but the shape of the letters more nearly resembles 
what we call " old English." These letters with their 
Roman equivalents and their names are as follows : — 



German 
letters. 


Roman 
letters. 


Names. 


German 
letters. 


Roman 

letters. 


Names, 


% a 


A, a 


ah 


% n 


N, n 


enn 


8, h 


B, b 


bay 


£>, o 


O, o 


oh 




C, c 

D, d 

E, e 


tsay 
day 
ay 


% X 


P. P 

Q. q 

R, r 


pay 
koo 
err 


% f 


F, f 


eff 


%,\ 3 


S, s 


ess 


M 


H, h 
I, i 


gay 
hah 
ee 


% t 
tt, it 


f , t 

U, u 

V, v 


tay 
oo 
fow 


ft, t 


J- J 
K, k 


yot 
kah 


2B, to 


W, w 
X, x 


vay 
ix 


m, m 


L 1 
M, m 


ell 
emm 




Z, z 


ipsilon 
tset 



■2 GERMAN LESSONS. 

2. Of the two forms for small s given above, the short § is usea 
at the end of a word, whether alone or in compound, and in a few 
other places which may be left to the observation of the learner ; 
the long f is used in all other situations. Thus : ba%, begljatb; but 
lefen, fefyen. Certain of the letters are modified in form when com- 
bined with others. Thus : dj, ch ; d, ck ; g, sz ; § f tz. 

3. Many German books, however, are now printed in Roman 
characters, such as are used in English. In writing, Germans gen- 
erally employ a special alphabet differing in many respects from 
ours. A copy of this script alphabet is given in the Appendix. 
When German is printed or written in English characters, all the 
letters are represented by their regular English equivalents, except 
that for g the special character J3 (or fs) is substituted. 

4. Every noun or word used as a noun must begin 
with a capital letter; adjectives of nationality, such as 
fpantfcf), Spanish do not begin with a capital. Other 
minor deviations from English practice may be readily 
learned from observation. 

5. The new orthography, as officially prescribed for use in the 
schools of Germany, is employed in this book. The changes in this 
orthography are so slight that they cause no difficulty in reading 
books printed in the old orthography. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



The following description is intended to De used only as a key . 
and is not an exhaustive treatment of the subject. Such a key can 
only be approximately correct, and no description can take the place. 
of the teacher's oral instruction. 



PRONUNCIATION. 3 

VOWELS. 

6. Quantity. {a) A vowel is short before a 
doubled consonant and generally before two consonants, 
unless the latter of the two is an inflectional ending. 
Thus: f)ftffen, @d)elm; but lobte (from loben). (b) 
Vowels are long when doubled, when followed by I) in 
the same syllable, and generally when followed by a 
single consonant. Thus : 83oot, 2of)tt, t)abe. 

Note. — While the foregoing rules are useful, the distinction 
between long and short vowels, particularly in monosyllabic words, 
is often to be learned only by practice. 

7. a, as a in father. The distinction between long 
and short a is one of quantity, not of quality, short a 
being merely shorter in time. Thus : Igaax, @tal)l ; farm, 
fdtjarf. 

8. Long e, as a in fate ; short e, as e in met. Thus: 
metjr, toet) ; benn, feitfam. In unaccented final syllables e 
is very short and is even often pronounced with an ob- 
scure sound, like u in but. Thus : l)atte, lobe. 

9. Long i, or te f as i in machine ; short t f as i in hit. 
Thus : it)r, liebe ; binbe, tft. 

10. Long o f as o in hold ; short o, not in English, but 
somewhat like o in off, never like o in hot. Thus : £3oot, 
loben; offen, ©ott. 

11. Long u, as oo in moon; short U r as oo in foot. 
Thus: S3lume f gut; SBruft, Gutter. 

12. t), usually as German t ; but many pronounce it 
as ii (see § 16). 



4 GERMAN LESSONS. 

MODIFIED VOWELS. 

13. The vowels a, 0, It, and the diphthong an are 
often modified and changed to a, o, it, cut (§ 19) re- 
spectively. This change (called Umlaut by the Ger- 
mans) was originally produced by the influence of an i 
(]) in the following syllable. In the old orthography 
these vowels, when capitals, were 2le, De, Ue, not %, £), tt, 
as in the new. 

14. Long ti, as ei in their; short a, as e in met. Thus : 
f lager, SSater; fjatte, 23anbe. 

15. The sounds for modified 8 have no equivalents in 
English, but are about the same as for French eu. If 
the lips are puckered as in whistling and the attempt is 
made to sound long English a as in mate, with the lips 
still in that position, long d will be given approximately. 
Similarly, short will be given by sounding e as in let, 
with lips as before. Thus: mogen, ©dfjtte; fonnen, 
offnen. 

16. The sounds for u also have no equivalents in 
English, but are about the same as for French u. The 
lips must be placed as described in § 15, and e as in 
meet sounded for long ix, and i as in pin for short U. 
Thus: iiber, miibe; fiiHen, ©ihtbe. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

17. at (at)) as i in mind. Thus : 9Kctt, Scttfer. 

18. au as ou in house. Thus : §au3 f 9J?au3. 

19. au as oi in oil. Thus : 33aume, ^aufer. 



PRONUNCIATION. . 5 

20. et (et)) as German ai. Thus : (St3, 93em. 

21. eu as cut. Thus : @ule, ®eute. 

22. te is not a diphthong, but represents the sound 
of long t (see § 9) ; but te is pronounced as a diphthong 
(about as English ye) in some foreign words accented 
on the antepenult. Thus : gamt'tte, St'lte. 

CONSONANTS. 

Consonants which are pronounced alike in English and German 
are omitted here. 

23. 6 usually as English b y but when final as/. Thus : 
£ctuk, ®te6. 

24. c as ts before e, t, t), a, ; elsewhere as k. Thus : 
©ocertt, Eafctr, Sari. 

25. b usually as English d; when final, as t. Thus : 
bir, 93anb. 

26. g as ^ in £<?/, but when final as d£) (see § 35), or 
by many as k. Thus: ©ott, tegett, Sag. Pronounce 
final tg like id), and for ttg see § 39. 

27. t), when initial, as English h; elsewhere it is 
silent. Thus : fjoffen, fetfjen. 

28. j as y in yet. Thus : \a, jeber. 

29. q is always followed by u, as in English. The 
combination is pronounced like German te (§33). 

30. r must be trilled, especially when initial or before 
a consonant, and is never to be pronounced as in Eng- 
lish. Thus : $iab, tt>tr, 6rbe. 



6 • GERMAN LESSONS. 

31 c f, when initial or between two vowels, about as s 
in has ; elsewhere as s in sit. Thus : fefjen, lefett, au<o. 
But see ft, fp (§ 43), and fe (§ 44). 

32. t> as English /. Thus: bier, brat). In foreign 
words it is often like English v. Thus : Safe, Sfofcember. 

33. in as English #. Thus : SBaffer, too. But after a 
consonant it is often given a sound intermediate between 
our v and w. This is true also of the combination qu. 

34. j as ts. Thus : jteljen, ju. 

CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. 

35. d) has two sounds, neither of which is found in 
English. After e, i, t), a, 0, ii, cut, et, eu, in the termina- 
tion djett, and after a consonant, it is somewhat like Eng- 
lish s/i, but the tip of the tongue must be held against 
the lower teeth in making the sound. After a, 0, U, and 
au it is harsh and guttural. Thus : id), burd), 2Mumd)en ; 
ad), Sod), 93ud). In foreign words d) is sometimes like 
k y sometimes like sh. 

36. d)3, when i belongs to the stem of the word, as x. 
Thus: 3Bad)3, gucfyS. But d) is pronounced as in § 35 
when 3 is merely added in the course of inflection. 

37. & as k. Thus : juriid, 23edfett- 

38. bt as & Thus : ©tabt, gefanbt. 

39. ng as ng in singer y never as m finger. Thus : fttt* 
gen, ginger, Stnget. 



PRONUNCIATION. 7 

40. pf, both consonants must be heard. Thus : *JSferb, 
jpfwtb.. 
. 41. ^as/. Thus: ^Ijtfofo^te, ^rctfe. 

42. \ti) as English sh. Thus : ©djjiff, beutfdj. 

43. Initial ft, fp, about as if they were skt, shp. Thus : 
ftarf, ©tein ; fpdt, ©prud). 

44. ff as ^ in sit. Thus : baJ3, 9Waf;. ff is not written 
at the end of a word, after a long vowel or diphthong, 
or before a consonant. For it in these positions is sub- 
stituted % Thus: gtujj (but gluffe), ©trctfte (a long), 
fliefcen, f)af$t (from fjaffen). 

45. tfj as /, not as English th. This combination is 
used, in the latest orthography, only in words of foreign 
origin. Thus : Sweater, £f)ron. 

46. % as German g. Thus : jei^t, §i£e. 

DOUBLED VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. 

47. Doubled vowels are pronounced like single long 
vowels, and doubled consonants like single consonants. 
Thus: 33oot, (Baal; laffen, fjoffen. But this rule does 
not apply to vowels or consonants made double in the 
composition, derivation, or inflection of words. These 
must be separated in pronunciation. Thus : be-enben (not 
beenben); afcbmben. 

ACCENT. 

48. As a rule, the stem syllable is accented, and in 
compounds the first component, much as in English. 



8 GERMAN LESSONS. 

Thus : lo'ben, getobt', ©trof)'f)iU\ It must be noted that 
the accent and pronunciation of words of foreign origin 
often violate the rules given above. In the case of 
words which may cause difficulty, the accent is marked 
in the following Lessons. 

DIVISION INTO SYLLABLES. 

49. Divide according to pronunciation; but notice 
that compounds will be divided into their components, 
and that d), fd), pi), ft, f$, and tl) must remain undivided 
and go with the latter vowel, while & becomes Vt Thus : 
lie^ben, bren-nen ; but jjer*etn, toctsfdjen, bruf-lett (brucfett)< 
Notice the use of the double hyphen instead of the sin* 
gle as in English. 



DECLENSION. 



LESSON I. 



DECLENSION. 

50. Declension is the variation of nouns, adjectives, 
and pronouns, to show number, case, and gender. 

51. There are in German two numbers, singular and 
plural, which are used much as in English. 

52. The cases are four — nominative, genitive *, dative, 
and accusative. Of these the nominative is the case of 
the subject, corresponding to the English subjective*; 
the genitive represents the English possessive and also 
most of the relations expressed by the preposition of; 
the dative is the case of the indirect object, representing 
many of the relations expressed by the prepositions to 
and for; the accusative corresponds in general to the 
English objective, being the case of the direct object. 

53. The genders are three — masculine, feminine, 
and neuter, German gender is not based upon sex so 
much as English. Many nouns which are neuter in 
English are masculine or feminine in German ; and some 
which are masculine or feminine in English are neuter 
in German. 

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

54. The definite article ber, the, is declined as fol- 
lows : — 



IO GERMAN LESSONS. 







SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 




m. 


/ 


n. 


m, f. n. 


N. 


ber 


bie 


ba$, the 


bie, the 


G. 


be$ 


ber 


beg, of the 


ber, of the 


D. 


bem 


ber 


bem, to the 


ben, to the 


A. 


ben 


bie 


ba$, the 


bie, the* 



55. The declension of ber shows how the case, gender, and 
number of a word may be expressed by an actual change of form. 
But observe that the same form of the article, bie for example, may 
stand for different cases, etc., and that the plural has no difference 
of form to express gender. 

56. Present Indicative of fein, to be. 

id) bin, / am fair finb, we are 

bn bift, thou art if)r feib, (ye) you ar* 

(fie, eg) er i[t, (she, it) he is (Sie)fte finb, (you) they are 

57. $u, t!jr, ©ic SDtt, if)r and ©ie may all be trans- 
lated hy you; but bu shows familiarity or intimacy, and 
is used particularly in the family ; ifjr is its plural ; @ie 
is more formal, and is more common outside the family. 
While always with a plural verb, @ie may be used in ad- 
dressing one or more persons. With this use of @ie, 
compare the English use of you with a. plural verb, al- 
though it may refer to only one person. 

Note. — As German gender does not depend upon sex, it n 
best always to learn the definite article with the noun. Learn ber 
(Garten, not simply Garten. Observe that every German noun must 
begin with a capital. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ©arten, the garden bie §anb, the hand 

ber 9ttann, the man, husband ba$ §au3, the house 



DECLENSION OF fcer. 



(I 



ber Dfen, the stove 
ber @of)n, the son 
ber |mnb, /A* dog 
be3 9ttanne3, 0///^ ;^tf?z 
be3 @of)ne3, 0///^ .raz* 
bie Sftanner, /A* ^^ 
bie gran, the woman, wife 
bie 931ume, the flower 
bie Gutter, /A* mother 
bie S£od)ter, ^ daughter 



ba3 $inb, the child 

be£ $inbe3, 0/ the child 

in (dat.), in 

cttt, old 

jung, young 

rot, red 

uttb, tf/zaf 

aber, #z^ 

nett, new 



EXERCISE I. 

i. £)er ©of)tt be3 3ftanne3. 2. ©er'SWuttcr unb ber 
Softer. 3. S)er §nnb ift in bem ©arten. 4. S£)a3 §au^ 
ift nen. 5. 23ir finb jnng. 6. 2)a3 $inb unb bm §nnb* 
7. Sn ber §anb. 8. S)ie S£od)ter ift jung, aber bie W\xt* 
ter ift alt. 9. 3ft ta§> §an3 rot? 10. 2)e3 <Sol)ne3 33ud). 
Hi S)ie SBtnme ift rot 12. @inb bie Scanner in bem ©ar* 
ten? 13. 3)u bift jung. 14, 2)en ©fen. 15. @r ift alt 
16. @ie ift bie S£oc£)ter ber gran. 

1. To the mother and the daughter. 2. The hand 
of the man. 3. Of the flower. 4. You are young, but 
I am old. 5. The stove is new. 6. The son's book. 
7. In the stove. 8. Of the child. 9. Is the flower red ? 
10. Of the men. 11. The mother and the child. 
12. We are in the garden. 13. He is the man's son. 
14. Is she the daughter of the woman? 15. To the 
son and the daughter. 16. Are they young? 



12 GERMAN LESSONS. 



LESSON II. 



WORDS DECLINED LIKE bet. 

58. Several words differ in declension from ber only 
in having e instead of te in the nominative and accusative 
of the feminine singular and of the plural, and e3 instead 
of a3 in the nominative and accusative of the neuter 
singular. The endings which are to be added to the 
stem of these words in declining them are as follows, 
the dash indicating the stem : — 







SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 




m. 


/ 


n. 


m. f. n. 


N. 


-er 


-e 


-e3 


-e 


G. 


-*8 


. -er 


-eS 


-er 


D. 


-em 


-er 


-em 


-en 


A. 


-en 


-e 


-e3 


-e 



59. 2)tefer, which is one of these words, is therefore 
declined as follows : — 







SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 




m. 


/ 


n. 


m. f. n. 


N. 


btefer 


btefe 


btefe£, this 


btefe, these 


G. 


btefe£ 


btefer 


btefe£, of this 


btefer, of these 


D. 


btefem 


btefer 


biefem f to this 


btefen, to -these 


A. 


btefen 


btefe 


btefe£, this 


btefe, these 



60. Like btefer are declined jener, that; jeber, each, 
every ; mmtdjer, many, many a; foldjer, such, such a; 



WORDS DECLINED LIKE t>Ct. 1 3 

roetdjer, which, what. The stems are jen, jeb r mandj, 
etc. 

61. Present Indicative of Ijaien, to have. 

id) fjabe, / have ttrir fjaben, we have 

bu f)aft, thou hast tf)r f)abt, you have 
(fie, e£) er f)at, A* Aaj (@ie) fie fjaben, (^«) //^ Aiz/* 

VOCABULARY. 

ber 23ater, the father ba3 *)3ferb, //&£ &ro* 

ber 83anm, the tree ba3 ^intnier, *<** room 

ber ©djtitffel, //^ foy be3 ^3ferbe^ f <j/7A* A<?r.^ 

ber SBrnber, the brother be3 3immer3, of the room 

be3 23rnber3, a/" the brother fdjtoars, £/#<:£ 

bte ©tabt, the city fd)on, beautiful, fine 

bie ©djjtoefter, /A* 5&fer nidfjt, not 

bie Xante, /A* aunt ober, #r 

ber @tabt f of the city toeife, zc/AzV* 

ber ©djtoefter, of the sister 

EXERCISE II. 

i. 2)iefe§ 9#anne3 |mnb ift fc^toarj. 2. Seber ©tabt. 
3. 3Me @cf)tt)efter jene£ 9ftanne3 ift fcfjon. 4. Sftandjem 
Sinbe. 5. 2)iefe3 $ud) ift fdjtoarj unb rttdjt rot. 6. SSeld^e^ 
@oi)ne£? 7. SBetejer §anb? 8. 2Bir fyaben ben ©djtfiffet 
be£ gimmer^. 9. 3ft jener Saurn alt? 10. Sn tueld^er 
Stabt? 1 1. S)er Dfen in biefem gimmer ift neu. 12. 3ft 
ba§ ^Pferb fdjtoarj ober toetfe? 13. S)ic Xante biefe3 SinbeS 
ift in ber ©tabt. 14. 3Kand)e3 SBrnberS. 15. ©old)e 
Scanner. 16. 2)a3 ®inb ift in biefem ©arten, aber ber 
£mnb ift in jenem §aufe. 



14 GERMAN LESSONS. 

I. Which man? 2. Has the woman the key of that 
room? 3. Of every son. 4. Is that city beautiful? 
5. Is the brother of this child young? 6. Have you 
the horse? 7. To many a sister. 8. The father of 
this woman is old. 9. Is this dog young? 10. Many 
a book. 11. In which garden is the tree? 12. This 
horse is not white. 13. Which men? 14. To every 
daughter. 15. That tree is beautiful. 16. Every house 
in the city. 



LESSON III. 



INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 



62. The indefinite article eitt, a, an, which has no 
plural, is declined as follows : — 







m. 


/ 


n. 




N. 


cut 


erne 


ein f a 




G. 


eme£ 


etner 


cine$, of a 




D. 


etnem 


etner 


etnem, to a 




A. 


cinen 


etne 


etn f a 


I 


53. Declension of fcht, 


, 110 , not a> not 


any. 






SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 




m. 


/ 


n. 


m. f. n. 


N. 


fein 


feine 


lein, no 


feme, no 


G. 


feineS 


leiner 


feute^ of no 


fetner, of no 


D. 


fetnem 


fetner 


letnem, to no 


fetnen, to no 


A. 


feuten 


feme 


letn, 110 


feme, no 



WORDS DECLINED LIKE eitt. IS 

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 

64. Like fetn are declined the possessive adjectives 
mem, my, beitt, thy, your, fern, his, its, if)r, her, their, vox- 
fer, our, euer, your. These words, as well as em and 
fetn, although otherwise like bfefet, have no ending for 
the masculine and neuter nominative and the neuter 
accusative singular. Uttfer and etter commonly omit e of 
the stem or of the ending. Thus : unfre for unfere ; 
unfre£ or unfer3 for unfere3, etc. 

65. Of the words for your, associate beitt with bu and 
eiter with the personal pronoun tt)r. The possessive ad- 
jective ifjr is to be associated with fie, and when written 
with a capital (Sf)t) means your, as ©te means you. 

66. The definite article is often used instead of ntein, beitt, etc., 
when no ambiguity can arise by so doing. Thus : 2£a8 Ijaft bit in bcr 
§anb? what have you in your hand f (See also § 265, */.) 

67. Preterit (Past) Indicative of fetn and Jjafien. 

id) toar, / was id) f)atte, / had 

bu toarft, thou wast bu fjatteft, thou hadst 

er roar, he was er fjatte, he had 

ftrir tuarett, we were ttrir fatten, we had 

i£)r toaret, you were Sfqt ^atttt, you had 

(@ie) fie toaten, {yoii) they (©ie) fie fjatten, {you) 

were they had 

VOCABULARY. 

ber SSogel, the bird ba3 Srot, the bread 

ber SBetter, the cousin grofc, great, large, tall 

ber greimb, the friend gut, good 



1 6 GERMAN LESSONS. 

(ber) SBtlfjetm, William fetjr, very 

bie ©abet, the fork £)iibfd£) f pretty 

bie greunbin, the {lady) friend too, w/^r* 

ba3 28affer, the water tva$, what 
ba§ 3Keffer, the knife 

EXERCISE III. 

i. 3ft 2Bttt)erm 3f)r SSetter? 2. ©r f)at feinen ' greunb. 
3. 9J?eine Sltime ift fet)r p&fd). 4. SBtr toarert in nnferem 
©arten. 5. Sfteine ©djtoefter unb if)re greunbin toaren in 
ber ©tabt. 6. 3d} f)atte- einen §unb. 7. 3Bo ift bein 
Srubcr? 8. ®r l>at ein SKcffcr unb eine ©abet 9. 3ft 
ber Dfen in feinem gimmer 9 ro fe ? ia £>ctben ©ie fein 
Srot? 11. 3^re Sfume ift in bent SBaffer. 12. 3Kein 
©of)n, too ift bein greunb SBilfjetm? 13. SCReirt 33ruber 
fjat einen SSogel in ber §anb. 14. ©eine3 23ater3 ^Sferb ift 
fefjr aft. 15. Suer SSetter ift ber greunb tnehteS S8ruber3. 
16. 2Ba3 fatten bie banner in itjrem gimmer? 

I. William had a knife, but no fork. 2. Their bread 
is very good. 3. Is your dog large? 4. Where is her 
book? 5. Your sister is beautiful. -6. My brother's 
house is very pretty. 7. They had the key of our 
room. 8. My mother is your friend. 9. His sister 
had a bird. 10. Has your cousin no friend in the city? 
1 1 . He has a son and a daughter. 1 2. Was their house 
old or new? 13. Your father had a horse and a dog. 
1 4. They were not young. 15. Has the child a flower ? 
16. Were you in their garden ? 



CONJUGATIONS. 1 7 



LESSON IV. 



CONJUGATIONS. 

68. There are two conjugations of verbs, the strong 
and the weak (also called the old and the new). The 
principal difference between the two is in the formation 
of the preterit and the past participle. 

69. In the strong conjugation the preterit is formed 
by a change (called Slbfctut) in the vowel of the root ; 
the past participle adds en, sometimes with and some- 
times without a change in the vowel of the root. Thus : 
ftnben, to find ; id) fcmb, I found; gefunben, found. In 
both conjugations the past participle usually takes the 
prefix ge. 

70. In the weak conjugation the preterit is formed 
by an addition to the root, without a change of the 
vowel ; the past participle adds t, also without chang- 
ing the vowel. Thus : bctuen, to build; tcf) bank, I built; 
gcbctut, built. The weak conjugation, being the simpler, 
will be taken up first. 

WEAK CONJUGATION. 

71. The following endings are to be added to the 
stem : — 



1 8 GERMAN LESSONS. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. Plu. Sing. Phi. Sing. Plu. 

-e -en -(e) te -(e) ten -e -(e) t 

-(Of* -(0* -(OM* -(c) tet (Polite form, -en ©ic) 
-(e)t -en -(0 te -(z)tw 

INFINITIVE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PAST PARTICIPLE. 

-en -enb 9 e -( e )t 

72. The e in parenthesis is usually omitted, unless 
the stem ends in a consonant which can not readily be 
sounded with the ending. Observe that the endings of 
the first and third person are alike except in the present 
indicative singular. As verbs are usually given in the 
infinitive form, the most convenient way of finding the 
stem is to strike off the infinitive ending en. 

73. Conjugation of the simple tenses, except those 
of the subjunctive, of loben, to praise : — 





PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


loben 




lobte gelobt 




INDICATIVE MODE. 


Present. 




Preterit. 


id) lobe, I praise 


, etc. 


id) lobte, I praised, etc. 


bu lobft 




bu lobteft 


er lobt 




er lobte 


totr loben 




ttnr lobten 


itjr lobt 




iljr lobtet 


fie loben 




fie lobten 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

lobe (bu),/77z^ {thou) lobet (tt)r), praise {you) 
loben ©ie r praise {you). See § 74. 



WEAK CONJUGATION. 19 



INFINITIVE. 



loben, jit loben, to praise 

PARTICIPLES. 

lobenb, praising getobt, praised 

74. Observe that id) lobe may be translated by / 
praise, I do praise, I am praising. That is, the German 
has only the one form for the various English conjuga- 
tions. The imperative loben ©te, while plural in form, 
may be either singular or plural in meaning. What 
has been said in § 57 about the use of bit, it)r, and ©te, 
applies also to the imperative. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ©djnetber, the tailor fctgen, say, tell 

ber Styfet, the apple t)6ren, hear 

ber 9?ocf, the coat lieben, love 

bie ©traf^e, the street batten, build 

ba$ 83fatt, the leaf leben, live, be alive 

ba§ ®i(b, the picture tooljnen, dwell, live 

bie 93tatter, the leaves faufen, buy 

bie Jtyfet, the apples madden, make 

auf (dat.), upon e3 ift (tvav), there is {was) 

t)iefe, many e3 finb (toaren), there are (were) 

EXERCISE IV. 

1. 9Kein SSater baute ba§ JgaviS. 2. 3f)re £ante toofytt 
in btefer ©trafee. 3. @3 finb btefe 25(atter auf bem 83attme. 
4. 3d) tjore ba§ Sttnb. 5. 2Bir loben S^ren greunb. 6. S)er 
@cf)neiber tnad)te meine3 93ruber3 9to& 7. 2Ba3 fagt bein 






20 GERMAN LESSONS. 

Setter? 8. ©te faufen letn JBtlb. 9. Sebt ba$ gtnb? 
10. §abt ii)r feme $fyfel? n. 3)ie 93tume tear fdjfln. 
12. 2)a£ Stttb Itebt feme ©djtoefter. 13. Saufe em 9Jieffer 
unb etne ©abet. 14. 3d) bin alt. 15. (S3 ftttb feme 3ftan= 
iter in bem ©arten. 16. 28 raufteft bu behten £>unb ? 

I. We have no stove in our room. 2. In which street 
do you live? 3. He bought a picture. 4. I love my 
brother. 5. Did you build the house? 6. Where does 
your sister live? 7. We are buying apples. 8. What 
did he hear? 9. They bought a flower. 10. The 
tailor is making my coat. 1 1 . There was a picture in 
this room. 12. What were you saying? 13. The 
flower is red. 14, I heard the bird in the tree. 
15. My cousin did have the key. 16. He praises their 
brother. 



LESSON V. 



STRONG CONJUGATION. 

75. In the strong conjugation the preterit is made by 
changing the vowel of the root ; the first and third sin- 
gular of the preterit have no endings, the other persons 
having the same endings as the present. The endings 
given in § 71 apply also to strong verbs, except in the 
preterit and past participle, the latter ending in en in- 
stead of (e)t. 



STRONG CONJUGATION. 2 1 

76. Conjugation of the simple tenses, except those of 
the subjunctive, of fin gen, to sing : — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

fingen fang gefungen 

INDICATIVE MODE. 

Present. Preterit, 

id) finge, / sing, etc. id) fang, / sang, etc. 

. bn fingft bn fangft 

er fingt er fang 

toir fingen toir fangen 

ifjr fingt iftr fangt 

fie fingen fie fangen 

IMPERATIVE MODE. 

Singular. " Plural. 

finge (bn), sing {thou) fittget (if)r), sing (you) 

fingen @ie, sing (you) 

INFINITIVE. 

fingen, jn fingen, to sing 

PARTICIPLES. 

fingenb, singing gefungen, sung 

77. In addition to the regular difference in the forma- 
tion of the preterit and past participles, some verbs of 
the strong conjugation further differ from those of the 
weak in changing the vowel of the second and third 
person singular of the present indicative. For exam- 
ple, strong verbs having a in the present stem change 
it in the second and third person singular to d; similarly, 
long e is changed to ie, and short e to i (with a few 



H GERMAN LESSONS. 

exceptions). Other vowel changes may be learned 
with the particular verb. The change from e to ie or 
i also takes place in the singular of the imperative, 
but not the change from a to a. Thus : 

id) felje, bu fieljft, er fiefjt ; imper., fief) 

id) fpredje, bit ftmdjft, er foridjt; imper., fpric^ 

idj bade, bu badft, er Mdt; imper., ba&t 

N. B. — The ending of the imperative singular of verbs which 
change e to te or i is regularly omitted. The weak forms bacfft, bacft, 
and especially the preterit bacfte, etc., are very common (cf. § 240). 

78. The strong verbs being for the most part very common, it 
is especially necessary that each verb should be thoroughly learned 
at its first occurrence. Every strong verb will be followed in the 
vocabularies by the number of the paragraph where it can be found 
in the list given in the appendix. From this list the student can 
learn all the necessary forms. The list also includes irregular verbs 
which are marked in the same way in the vocabularies. 

Present and Preterit of lucrbcn, to become, grow. 

79. SBerben has some of the characteristics of both 
the strong and the weak conjugation, its present and 
preterit being as follows : — 



id) toerbe, / become, etc. id) ttmrbe (or toctrb), I became, etc, 

bu toirft bu tourbeft (or toarbft) 

er toirb er ttmrbe (or toarb) 

toir tDerben ttrir ttmrben 

it)r tuerbet ifjr tourbet 

fie toerben [ie ttmrben 



STRONG CONJUGATION. 23 

VOCABULARY. 

&er ®5ntg, the king bie @Iafer r the glasses 

ber Kaufmann, the merchant geben (§ 239), give 

ber Stldjen, the cake fyrecljen (§238), speak 

bet %\\<&), the table bacfen (§ 240), bake 

bie SJhtfif, the music fittbett (§ 237), find 

bte SCinte, the- ink effert (§ 239), *a/ 

ba3 Sicb, the song freffert (§239),^/ {of animals) 

ba$ ©ta3, the glass fe^en (§ 239), j** 

(bdS) -©nglifd}, English nein, /z# 

(ba3) 2>eutfd), German nur, 0/z/^ 

bte Sieber, />^ #?/2g3 

exercise v. 

1. ©r faf) ben Sfintg. 2. ©a3 Stnb a£ ben ffiudjen. 

3. Seine SUhttter bacfte 23rot. 4. ©prtdjft bu ©nglifdj? 
5. Sftein, id) fprec£)e nur ©eutfdf), aber metn SBruber fpridjt 
(Sngtifd). 6. 28a3 frifet ber £unb? 7. SBetdjeS Steb 
fangen fie? 8. SBir fafjen triete ©tafer auf bent Sifdje. 
9. 2Sir fjoren bie SJJufif. 10. 2ft ein @of)n fanb eine Slume 
auf ber Strafe. 11. ©teljft bu bm Saufmamt? 12. (£r 
gibt nteinem SBruber Stpfet. 1 3 . 28 f anben ©ie bie Sinte ? 
14. 3fj nur S3rot. 15. @ie toirb alt. 16. ganbet ifjr ben 
Saufntann in ber ©tabt ? 

1. Did you hear the songs of my sister? 2. He finds 
no glass on the table. 3. Give the child a cake. 

4. Are you eating the apple? 5. I see no stove in the 
room. 6. Sing a song. 7. Does your friend speak 
German? 8. The merchant saw the king. 9. I bought 



24 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



a horse and a dog. 10. Where did she find the book? 
II. He loves his sister. 12. He is giving his mother a 
flower. 13. What was the horse eating? 14. The 
man was eating bread. 15. See the tree in the garden. 
16. The flower was growing red. 



LESSON VI. 



COMPOUND TENSES OF f)(lbctl. 

80. Compound tenses, indicative mood, and impera- 
tive of tjctben (cf. § 235, d.) : — 



id) f)abe getjabt, I have had, 

etc. 
bu Ijaft gefjabt 
er fjat geljabt 

fair fyaben gefjabt 
tt)r t)abt gefjabt 
fie Ijaben getjabt 

FUTURE. 

tdj toerbc (jaben, I shall 

have, etc. 
bu ttrirft fyaben 
er toirb Ijaben 

totr tuerben t)aben 
tt)r luerbet fjaben 
fie toerben tjaben 



PLUPERFECT. 

id) f)atte gefyabt, / had had, 

etc. 
bu fjatteft gefyabt 
er ^atte gefjabt 

nnr fatten gefjabt 
i^r fjattet gefyabt 
fie fatten gefyabt 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe gefyabt fjaben, /shall 

have had, etc. 
bu tutrft getjabt Ijaben 
er toirb gefyabt fjaben 

toir luerben getjabt Ijaben 
ifjr tuerbet getjabt fmben 
fie toerben gefjabt fjaben 



COMPOUND TENSES. 25 

IMPERATIVE. 

Ijabe (bu), have (thou) fjabet (H>r) # have {you) 

fjaben ©te, //#^ {you) 

INFINITIVE. 

geljabt fyaben, get)abt ju f)aben, to &*w &w/ 

COMPOUND TENSES WITH Ijafcett. 

81. In the same way are conjugated the compound 
tenses of most strong and weak verbs, f)Ctben being the 
auxiliary for the perfect and pluperfect and toerben for 
the future. Observe the order of the past participle 
and the infinitive of the auxiliary in the future perfect, 
and note also that the object and other modifiers of the 
verb precede the participle or infinitive. 

82. Synopsis of the compound tenses, indicative 
mode, of a weak and a strong verb (cf. § 235, a) : — 

PERFECT. PERFECT. 

id) fjabe gelobt id) Ijctbe gefungen 

bu t)aft gelobt, etc. bu tjaft gefungen, etc- 

PLUPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

tdj tjatte gelobt id) fyatte gefungen 

FUTURE. FUTURE. 

id) toerbe toben idj tocrbc ftngen 

FUTURE PERFECT. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) tuerbe gelobt tjctben tdj luerbe gefungen tjaben 

INFINITIVE. INFINITIVE. 

gelobt tjaben, gelobt ju f)aben gefungen tjaben, gefungen ju 

haben 



26 GERMAN LESSONS. 

83. Declension of id), /. 





SINGULAR. 


PLURAL 


N. 


H$,/ 


toir, we 


G. 


meiner (mein), of me 


unfer, of us 


D. 


mir, to me 


un3, to &.r 


A. 


mict), me 


un3, »j 



84. Observe that the possessive adjectives tnettt, etc., are used 
to indicate possession, and not the genitive of the pronoun meiner, 
etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber Setjrer, the teacher ba§ Slier, the animal 

ber ©cf)itf), the shoe ba$ $teifd), the meat 
ber ©cpler, the pupil, scholar bte ©d)ul)e, the shoes 

ber Seller, the plate bte Stiere, /^ animals 

bte 2lufga6e, /^ /^mwi ternen, to learn 

bte Utjr, the watch, clock lefeit (§ 239), to read 

bte 9?ofe f the rose lefjren, to teach 

ba$ @d)iof3, the castle netjmen (§ 238), to take 
ba3 ©orf, £&* village 

EXERCISE VI. 

1. Unfer Seljrer toirb mid) toben. 2. §a6t tljr eure 5Ii!f= 
gctuegelernt? 3. @r fjat mir feme Ul)r gegebcn. 4. SBetdje 
Xiere freffen gteifcf) ? 5 . S)er $onig tjatte in jenem @d)l0f$ 
getoofjnt. 6. S)tc SKutter l)at un3 biefe ©djufje gefanft. 
7. £)a3 Sinb toirb biefeS S3nd) lefcn. 8. 3d) lja6e ben 95ogei 
getjort. 9. §atte fie bie SRofe genommen? 10. ©ieljaben 
un3 geletjrt. 1 1. ©r toirb ba$ Sieb gelernt fjafcn. 12. 2Bir 
toerben iljren 93ater fefjen. 13. 2Ba£ fjaft bu gefunben? 



COMPOUND TENSES. 27 

14. 3f)r tjabt fetnett 2ef)rer getjabt. 15. ®r axemen 
SfyfeE 16. SBerbert ©te fern §au£ laufert? 

1. I had learned the song. 2. He has bought me 
the horse. 3. A friend had given us the picture. 
4. Will you speak English or German? 5. Where will 
he buy his shoes? 6. Has your sister sung the song? 
7. You had seen the rose. 8. We shall have read the 
book. 9. Where have you had the plate? 10. Had 
he seen my watch? 11. Take this fork. 12. They 
will live in this village. 13. The dog had eaten the 
meat. 1 4. My father will teach me. 1 5 . Have you baked 
bread? 16. The men have found the castle. 



LESSON VII. 



COMPOUND TENSES OF fettt. 

85. The compound tenses, indicative mode, and im- 
perative of fettt are as follows (cf. § 235, e.) : — 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) bin gemefett, I have been, itf) wax getoefett, I hadbeen> 

etc. etc. 

bu btft getoefett bit toarft getoefett 

er ift geroefen er iuar getoefett 

itrir fittb gettefett toir toarett getaefen 

i()r feib getoefen ifjr ttmret geroefen 

fie fittb getoefen fie ttmren getoefen 



28 GERMAN LESSONS. 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) tuerbe fern, I shall be, id) toerbe getoefen {cut, I shall 

etc. have been, etc. 

bit iuirft fein bn totrft gciuefen fein 

er ttrirb fein er tutrb getoefen fein 

toir toerben fein lutr toerben getuefen fein 

ifjit tuerbet fein if)r toerbet getoefen fein 

fie tocrben fein fie toerben getuefen fein 

IMPERATIVE. 

fet (bu), be (fhoii) feib (i()r), be {you) 

feien ©ie, be {yon) 

INFINITIVE. 

getoefen fetn r geroefen ju fein, to have been 

86. Declension of bu, thou {you). 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. bit, thou \i)v f ye,you 

G. beiner, of thee eiter, of you 

D. bir, to thee t\\6),you 

A. bid), thee eucf), you 

WORD-ORDER. 

87. The following remarks with regard to word-order 
should be carefully noted : — 

1. A pronoun object precedes a noun object. 

2. A simple adverb of time usually follows a pronoun 
object and precedes a noun object. 

3. An indirect object usually precedes a direct object 

4. Adverbs other than those of time, and preposi- 



COMPOUND TENSES. 29 

tional phrases modifying the verb, follow noun ob- 
jects. 

5. The negative rtidjt, unless it modifies some word 
or phrase, follows the adverbs. 

6. A predicate noun or adjective usually follows 
the negative. 

7. The modifiers of a participle or infinitive precede. 

88. With the exception of the subject and its verb 
the order of elements will therefore generally be: 1. 
Pronoun object \ 2. Adverb of time, 3. Noun objects, 4. 
Other adverbs, 5. Negation, 6. Predicate adjective or 
noun. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ®tuf)t f the chair jartgen (§242), to catch 

ber Sag, the day judjen, to seek, search 

ber SBalb, the woods, forest pftanjen, to plant 

bte Sonigin, the queen tjeute, to-day 

(btc) ©ertrub, Gertrude morgen, to-morrow 

i>a$ ©tM, the piece u&ermorgett, day after to-mon 

ba3 $)3aar, the pair row 

(ba§) Sonbon, London geftem, yesterday 

franf, ill fcorgeftern, day before yester- 

ftciit, little, small day 

btenen (dat. ), to serve 

EXERCISE VII. 

1. 35er £ag ftrirb fcfyfin fein. 2. %<$) gab bem £unbe em 
©tfld $leifcf). 3. 2Jtein 23ater biente bem £onig unb ber 
Konigin. 4. @ei mein greunb. 5. @r nrirb un3 morgen 



30 GERMAN LESSONS. 

$rot in bem ©orfe faufen. 6. 2Ba3 pflcmjtefi bu fcorgeftern 
m bem SBalbe ? 7. Sie l;aben ben ©tiu)l nicfyt genommen. 

8. 3Bo fing er ba£ £ier ? 9. ©ertrub ift geftern in Sonbon 
getoefen. 10. (Seine U(;r ift Hcin, aber nicfyt fefyr ^>iibfdE>. 
11. 2Bir toerben iibermorgen ein ^aax ©tfmfje madden. 12. 
£)er ^aufmann ift fyeute fetyr franf. • 13. 3d£> toerbe eud) 
tnorgen bie ©Iftfer geben. 14. Sfyre greunbin fucfyt eine 
Slume in bem ©arten. 15. ©eib fo gnt unb finget mir bag 
Sieb. 16. @3 toaren borgeftern biele flatter anf bem SBaffer. 

1. What did your son seek in the woods yesterday? 
2. Our house will be small. 3. Has Gertrude baked 
the cake? 4. The day has been beautiful. 5. Where 
did you find the table and the chair? 6. I shall be in 
the city day after to-morrow. 7. He is planting the 
tree in the garden to-day. 8. The queen had been ill. 

9. My child, do not eat this piece [of*] bread. 10. I 
saw you day before yesterday in the castle. 1 1 . They 
will not live in the city [of] London. 12. Has your 
brother been serving the king? 13. We caught the 
bird in the room. 14. Your mother will buy you a 
pair [of] shoes to-morrow. 15. She had seen an 
apple on the plate. 16. William did not sing this 
song yesterday. 

* The sign [ ] indicates that a word is to be omitted ; ( ) that 
It is to be inserted in the translation. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



31 



LESSON VIII. 



COMPOUND TENSES OF tuetfcetU 

89. The compound tenses, indicative mode, and 
imperative of tuerben are as follows (cf. § 235,/.) : — 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

tcf) 6tn getuorben, I have be- id) tuar getuorben, I had be- 



come, etc. 
bu uift getuorben 
er tft getuorben 

tuir ftnb getuorben 
ifyr feib getuorben 
fie ftnb getuorben 



come, etc. 
bu. luctrft getuorben 
er tuctr getuorben 

tuir tuctren getuorben 
if)r tuaret getuorben 
fie tuaren getuorben 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



id) toerbe tuerben, I shall be- id) tuerbe getuorben fein, / 



come, etc. 
bu ttrirft tuerben 
er tuirb tuerben 

tuir tuerben tuerben 
il)r tuerbet tuerben 
fie tuerben tuerben 



shall have become, etc. 
bu tuirft getuorben fein 
er tuirb getuorben fein 

tuir tuerben getuorben fein 
tfyr tuerbet getuorben fein 
fie tuerben getuorben fein 



IMPERATIVE. 



tuerbe (bu), become (thou) tuerbet (if)r), become {you) 
tuerben ©ie, become {you) 



32 GERMAN LESSONS. 

INFINITIVE. 

getoorben fetn, gefoorben ju fetn, to have become 



OTHER VERBS WITH fcitt. 

! 90. With [ettt are also conjugated certain intransitive 
verbs which express a change of condition, or motion 
to or from a place, and a few others. Examples of such 
verbs are fterben, to die, toad)[en, to grow, fommen, to come, 
Iaufen r to run, etc. Such verbs will be followed in the 
vocabularies by f. (for feitt) and need special attention. 
Notice the English, / am come, he is gone, etc. 

91. Synopsis of the compound tenses of fommen 
(§238), illustrating the conjugation of a verb with 
feitt (cf. §235, c): — 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) bin gefommen, / have id) ttmr gefommen, / had 
come come 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) tuerbe fommen, / shall id) tuerbe gefommen fetn, / 
come shall have come 

92. About twenty verbs of motion take fetn when the direction 
or extent of the motion, -or the place of arrival or departure is ex- 
pressed, and Ijaben when nothing but the action is to be shown. Thus : 
3d) bin nadj bonbon geritten {ridden}, but id) Ijabe lange geritten. 
As such verbs will therefore generally take fetn, the subject is not 
further treated in this book. 

93. Declension o£ er, ftc, e8, he, she, it : — 



COMPOUND TENSES. 33 









SINGULAR. 




N. 


er 




fie 


e3 


he, she, it 


G. 


feiner 


(fein) 


ifyrer 


feiner (fcin) 


of him, her, it 


D. 


ifym 




if)t 


ifym 


to him, her, it 


A. 


ifm 




fie 


e3 


him, her, it 








PLURAL. 






N. 


fie, they 


©te, you 






G. 


iljirer, 


of them 


S^ter, of you 




D. 


tfynen, 


, to them 


3fynen, to you 




A. 


fie, them 


(Bit, you 





94. German gender not being based on sex, care must be 
taken in the use of the third personal pronoun. The pronoun 
must agree with the gender of its noun, and it will therefore often 
happen that er or fie will represent an English it, or e8 an English 
he or she. It will be observed that ©ie ( you) is in reality the plu- 
ral of the third personal pronoun, although now used as a second 
personal. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ©nglchtber, the English- ftcrbcn, f. (§ 238), to die 

man laufen, f. (§ 243), to run 

ber ©tener, the servant hmdjfen, f. (§ 240), to grow 

bte SBoctje, the week fofgcn, f. (dat.), to follow 

ba$ ©djiuert, the sword btetben, f. (§ 245), to remain 

bct3 9Setlcl)cn, the violet in (ace), into 

fteifttg, industrious au§ (dat.), out of, from 

tlav, clear Add} (dat.), to, towards 

ftarf, strong narf) £mnfe, home 

EXERCISE VIII. 

1. ©er ©tetter tft in fionbon geblteben. 2. ©er £ag ttrirb 
flar toerben. 3. ©a3 33eiltf;en Vt>adE>ft in bem SBalbe. 4. ©u 



34 GERMAN LESSONS. 

bift frcmf, mein Jltnb, aber bu mirft ftarf toerben. 5. $ommt 
in ba£ &au3. 6. ©ein $ater ift geftern geftotben. 7. Set 
Gngldnber f)at nur ©ngltfd^ gef^rod;en. 8. ©eib fleifng, unb 
ifyr toerbet bie Sieber lerncn. 9. 3^r So^n tyatte ba3 ©cfytoert 
gefunben. 10. ©er $aufmamt ttrirb biefe 3Bod;e fommen. 
11. aWein better tear nad) £aufe gelaufen, 12. ©ertrub ift 
tf)ter ^reunbin gefotgt. 13. ©iefer ©tfmeiber l;at i§m feinen 
3?0(f gemacfyt. 14. 2)er 33aum tear fdjjon geftwben. 15. 
S)er ©cfmler ift au3 bem £aufe gelaufen. 16. ®a£ ^Sferb 
toar Sfynen gefolgt. 

1. They have come home. 2. We had remained in 
our room. 3. My dog will not run into the woods ; it 
(§ 94) is ill. 4. His servant bought him the sword. 
5. I shall live in the house this week. 6. We had fol- 
lowed them into that castle. 7. The Englishman had 
not been serving her. 8. Have you seen many violets 
in the woods? 9. The king had died in London. 10. 
This table is not strong ; do not buy it. 11. Take this 
flower; it grew in our garden. 12. He has been in- 
dustrious and (has) learned his lesson. 13. The day 
had grown* clear. 14. Had you run out of the room? 
15. They will come to London. 16.' Say it [to] your 
brother to-morrow. 

* ttmdjfen or tuerbert? 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 35 



LESSON IX. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

95. There are two declensions of nouns in German, 
me strong and the weak (or the first and the second). 
Nouns whose genitive singular ends in (e)3 are of the 
strong declension ; those whose genitive singular ends 
in (e)tt are of the weak declension. Strong nouns are 
divided into three classes, the nominative plural being 
the basis of classification; the weak declension is not 
subdivided. 

96. The following observations will aid in the mastery 
of the declension of nouns : — 

1. Feminine nouns are not inflected in the singular; 
their division into declension and classes is therefore 
based on the nominative plural. 

2. The dative plural always ends in (c)tl. 

3. To decline a noun it is usually necessary to know 
the genitive singular and the nominative plural. 

STRONG DECLENSION, CLASS I. 

97. Nouns of the first class of the strong declension 
add no ending for the nominative plural, but about twenty 
masculines (cf. § 229), the neuter Stofter, cloister, con- 
vent, and the feminines Sftutter and S£odE)ter modify the 
root-vowel throughout the plural. Words ending in it 



36 GERMAN LESSONS. 

do not take an additional it in the dative plural. The 
endings of this class are as follows : 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

n. — _n_ 

g. — s _n_ 

D. (") n 

A. _TL 

98. To this class belong masculine and neuter nouns 
ending in et, er, en (including infinitives used as noun c , 
which are neuter) ; the masculine Safe, cheese ; only 
two feminines, SJtutter and £odE)ter; diminutives in djen 
and lettt (which are always neuter) ; and neuters having 
the prefix ©e and ending in e. 

99. Declension of nouns with and without umlaut in 
the plural : — 

ber SBagett, the wagon ba§ ©emtiibe, the painting 
bte 9JJ utter, the mother 



N. ber SBagen ba3 ©emalbe bte Gutter 

G. be3 2Bagen§ be£ ©emalbeg ber 3Jlutter 

D. bent SBagen bem ©emalbe ■ ber 9Jtutter 

A. ben 3Bagen ba£ ©emalbe bte Sautter 

PLURAL. 

N. bte SBagen bte ©emalbe bte 9Kittter 

G. ber SBagen ber ©emalbe ber -JJJiitter 

D. ben SBagen ben ©emalben ben SDiitttern 

A. bte SBagen bte ©emalbe bte 3Kiltter 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 37 

100. Decline with modification of the vowel in the 
plural Styfcl, ©artcit, Dfert, SSogcl, SSatcr, 93ruber, Softer, 
Slofter ; also bcr Sctbett, /A* ^/^/, ber jammer, the ham- 
mer, ber dSdjtoager, the brother-in-law. 

101. Decline without changing the vowel in the plural 
©tetter, ©djlfiffel, ^ui^en, Sefjrer, ©emitter, SMfe, Seller, 
©ngtanber, ©tfjnetber, dimmer, SBctffer, Sfteffcr, 93ett(f)ert ; 
also ber Soffet, the spoon, ber ©tiefet, the boot, bct3 grdu- 
kin, the young lady, Miss, ba$ Wlabfytn, the maiden, girl. 

INVERTED ORDER. 

102. German sentences have already occurred in 
which the verb has preceded the subject. This will be 
the case in every principal clause in which for any 
reason it is desired to put the verb or any modifier of 
the verb at the beginning of the clause. This arrange- 
ment of the inflected part of the verb (personal verb) 
before the subject is known as the inverted order, while 
the order with the subject preceding the verb is called 
the normal order. 

VOCABULARY. 

blent, blue getjen, f. (§ 242), to go 

grcut, gray ■ ftefyen (§ 240), to stand 

toofyl, well ladjett, to laugh 

f)ter, here ju 4>au)e, at home 

gu (dat.), to 

EXERCISE IX. 

1. Stte Styfel finb in bem ©arten meineS 33ater§. 2. 2Ba- 
ren bte aSogel blau ober fd&toarj? 3. 2Bo finb bie gfiffel imb 



38 GERMAN LESSONS. 

bte aWeffer? 4. 6o$fl bu fciele Saben in Sonbon ? 5. $dj 
fyabt feine ©ematbe in meinem £aufe. 6. £)te ©nglanber 
blieben mdjt ju £aufe. 7. 2Bo ftanben bte ftldfier ? 8. SDer 
©iener meine£ ©d)toager£ ift franf. 9. 2)te ©emitter ladjten. 
10. SDie Gutter biefer 3flabcfyen finb geftern ^ier getoefen. 1 ic 
&ahm ©ie ifym bie ©tiefel? 12. £)a3 5linb ging ju ifyr. 
13. 2Bo fanb er fotdje jammer ? 14. ©ein 3io(f tt)ar nicf)t 
grau. 15. S)ie $rautein finb nidjt ju £aufe. 16. S)er £unb 
fotgte ntir unb meinen 23riibem. 

1. What did he give you? 2. The stoves in our 
house are new. 3. My daughters are well to-day. 
4. We shall go to them. 5. The girls will not be at 
home to-morrow. 6. I saw the violets in your garden 
yesterday; they are very blue. 7. She will bake the 
cakes to-day. 8. Has your teacher many pupils? 
9. Our servants and I are going home. 10. They have 
taken the plates. II. In which rooms shall I find the 
pupils and the teachers? 12. We remained in the 
shop. 13. Had you had the keys? 14. My father 
and (my) brothers have gone into the house. 15. I 
have found your watch ; it was in your room. 16. The 
horse is eating apples. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 39 



LESSON X. 



STRONG DECLENSION, CLASS II. 

103. This class adds e, sometimes with and some- 
times without umlaut, to make the nominative plural. 
The genitive singular ends in (e)£ and the dative singu- 
lar frequently in e. The endings of the class are there- 
fore as follows : 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. (") e 

G. (e)3 n e 

D. (e) (") en 

A. (") e 

104. This class is much larger than any other, and 
consequently more difficult to define. It includes mono- 
syllabic masculines as a class, and polysyllabic mascu- 
lines not expressly provided for elsewhere ; feminines in 
futtft, ttt§, and fat, and about thirty monosyllabic feminines 
(cf. § 230) ; some monosyllabic neuters (cf. § 230), 
and all polysyllabic neuters not provided for elsewhere. 

Note. — There are only a few feminines in ni$ and fal, these 
terminations being regularly neuter, and as such belonging to this 
class. Observe the doubling of the f of ni$ before c of a termina- 
tion. Thus : (SefcmgtiiS, (SefcmgtuffeS, etc. 

105. Declension of nouns with and without umlaut 
in the plural : — 



4o 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



$er <5of)ti, the son ber Sttonat, the month toe Stabt, the citf 



N. ber ©ofyn 

G. be3 ©ofyneg 

D. bem ©ofyne 

A. ben ©ofyn 



SINGULAR. 

ber 9Jtonat 
be3 3Jtonat£ 
bem 3JJonat 
ben 9ftonat 



bie ©tabt 
ber ©tabt 
ber ©tabt 
bie ©tabt 



N. bie ©ofjme 

G. ber ©ofyne 

D. ben ©ofynen 

A. bie ©dfyne 



bie aJlonate 
ber SDfonate 
ben 9JJonaten 
bie donate 



bie ©tabte 
ber ©tabte 
ben ©tabten 
bie ©tabic 



106. The omission or retention of e in the genitive singular de- 
pends largely on considerations of taste and euphony. It is quite 
commonly omitted in polysyllables, and retained in monosyllables. 
Its use is imperative with nouns ending with a sibilant. Thus: 
(SefangniffeS, ©a£e8. The adding of e for the dative singular depends 
upon similar considerations. 

107. Of the masculines in this class the great majority modify 
the vowel in the plural ; of the feminines all except those in ni§ and 
fat ; of the neuters only two, gtog, raft and GHjor, choir, 

108. Decline with modification of the vowel in the 
plural 23aum, 9Jocf, ©tuf)I, §cmb ; also ber guft, the 
foot, ber ©aft, the guest, ber JQV&, the hat, bie Sftatfjt, the 
night, bie Suft, the air, 

109. Decline without change of vowel in the plural 
•gmnb, $ferb, ©rot, $dmg, £ifd), £ier, gteifcl), Xag, ©titcf, 
$J3aar, ©cljitt). 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 41 

PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 

110. The following nine prepositions take the dative 
when they express rest or motion in a place, and the 
accusative when they express or imply motion from one 
place to another : — 

an, at, on fiber, over, above 

auf, upon, on unter, under, below, among 

f)tnter, behind t)0r, before, in front of, ago 

in, in, into jtnifcfjen, between 

neben, beside, by 

111. The definite article is often contracted with prep- 
ositions and, very rarely, with other words. Thus : im, 
for in bem; auf£, for auf ba§; gur, for gu ber. The 
contractions may be readily learned in practice. 

VOCABULARY. 

ein, one fallen, f. (§ 241), to fall 

gtuet, two fegen, to lay 

bret, three man, one, they 

t>kx,four lang, long 



\\x\\\,five 



exercise x. 



1. £abt it)v feme ©cfyutye an ben ^iA&nl 2. Unfere ©ftfte 
ftnb Ijeute gefommen. 3. 2)a£ Hinb I?at ein ©tfidf Srot unb 
jtoei 2tyfet gegeffen. 4. £ege ba3 23ud; auf ben Sifcfy. 5. 
SDein £ut toar in3 2Baffer gefallen. 6. 2)er Hdnig fyat bier 
^Bferbe, fagt man. 7. 2)ie £iere ftanben Winter ben 33aumen. 
8. 2)ie 9iatf)te finb lang. 9. liber un§ fatten ftrir einen SSoget 
in ber Sufi 10. SDie 3JMbdjen toerben fcor bem ©djloffe fingen. 



42 GERMAN LESSONS. 

ii« Sefai SSoter lauftc xfym einen ©tit 12. 2Beldjer ©tfmeiber 
macfyt 3^rc Stode? 13. Unfere ©djtoefter ift Dor brei £agen 
nacfy £aufe gefommen. 14. ©ie ©abel fiet unter ben SHfd). 
15. %<$) legte biett^r auf ben ©tufyl. 16. 3Bo lauft man 
gleifdj ? 17. £)a3 £ter tyat feine £anbe. 

1. He stood between me and his brother. 2. His 
father has bought him a pair [of] shoes. 3. His hat 
was not in the room. 4. Three chairs are standing 
beside the table. 5. My dog and I ran behind the 
house. 6. He was well yesterday, but I have not seen 
him to-day. 7. The merchant was in London five 
days ago. 8. I saw only water under me. 9. The 
guests of my father will come to-morrow. 10. We 
shall buy two horses and a wagon. 1 1. Her watch fell 
on the table. 12. She stood beside me, but did not see 
me. 13. These hats are not new. 14. Give the ani- 
mals water and meat. 15. The child had his shoes in 
his hands. 16. The trees in the village are beautiful. 



LESSON XL 



STRONG DECLENSION, CLASS III. 

112. This class adds er to make the nominative plural, 
with modification of the vowel in all nouns capable of 
taking it. The remarks with regard to the retention or 
omission of e in the genitive and dative singular of the 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



43 



second class apply also to the third class. The endings 
are as follows : 



5J 

N. 


lMljUi-,AK.. 


G. 


(e)» 


D. 


(e) 


A. 





-er 



-er 



em 

er 

113. To this class belong about fifty monosyllabic 
neuters, about half a dozen polysyllabic neuters ; about 
a dozen masculines (cf. § 231); and all nouns ending 
in turn, a few of which are masculine, the rest being 
neuter. There are no feminines in the class. 

114. Declension of nouns in the third class : — . 

ba$ fBiatt, the leaf fcer 2Jiamt, the man ber 3>rrium, the error 



N. badSlatt 

G. bed Slotted 

D. bem Statte 

A. bag Sfatt 

N. bie flatter 

G. ber flatter 

D. ben Slattern 

A. bie Blatter 



SINGULAR. 

ber SRotm 

bed WanntZ 
bem 3Kcmne 
ben ffllann 

PLURAL. 

bie manner 
ber 3Jtanner 
ben 3ftftmtern 
bie 3ftanner 



ber S^rtum 
bed 3rrtttm$ 
bem 3^rtum 
ben 3rrtum 

bie 3n*flmer 
ber Srrtfimer 
ben Strtfintern 
bie 3rrtflmer 



115. Decline in this class 33udj, ffiutb, §aug, 33tlb, Steb, 
©lag. ©djlofc, ©djtoert, Storf, 2Balb ; also bag @t, the egg, 



44 GERMAN LESSONS. 

ba§ getb, the field, bctS ©eftdjt, the face, ba$ filletb, the 
dress, ba$ Sal, the valley, (ber) ©ott, GW. 

116. Declension of the Interrogatives toer, who, and 



N. 


toer 


tt>a3 


G. 


loeffen (toe£) 


tt>effen (tt>e^) 


D. 


toem 


(no dative) 


A. 


toen 


toctS 



117. SBer is used of persons, for both genders and 
numbers, and toct3 of things. The declension of toetdjer, 
which is used both as an adjective and a pronoun, is 
given in § 6o. 

SUBSTITUTION OF ft>0 AND bft FOR PRONOUNS. 

118. Instead of a dative or accusative of tt)a3 with a 
preposition, too, where (before a vowel toor), is used in 
composition with the preposition. Thus : toobitrd), for 
burcE) toa3 ; toorauf for cmf toa3. Notice English wherewith, 
whereby, etc. In a similar manner ba, there (before a vowel 
bar) , is used instead of the dative or accusative of a third 
personal pronoun or of a demonstrative pronoun, when 
the pronoun refers to a thing, not to a person. Thus : 
bctmit, for mit if)m ; barau3, for au£ ifym. The phrases 
with it, with them, in it, in them, etc., when referring to 
things, will therefore be translated by bctmtt, barm, etc. 
Notice English therewith, therein, etc. Carefully avoid 
the use after a preposition of toa3, and of the third per- 
sonal pronoun or demonstrative pronoun when referring 
to things. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 45 

VOCABULARY. 

ber SRomer, the Roman gtoolf, twelve 

ledjS, six fomten (§ 250), can, to be able 

fieben, seven fiitjren, lead 

ad)t, eight aud), too, also 

neun, nine \& f y es 

jefjn, te/z md)t§ (indec), nothing 

elf, eleven 

EXERCISE XL 

1. ©a£ $inb fanb fieben ©ier im SBalbe. 2. 2Bem gaben 
©ie bie ©djtoerter? 3. ©ie toerben im ^rrtum bteiben. 4. 
SDie ©orfer in biefem Sale finb fe£>r flcin. 5. 6r fann tttdjt* 
[efyen. 6. 9JJein 9Sater fiityrte mid) in ben 2Balb. 7. £)er 
ig imb fafy bem 9Jf anne inS ©eficfyt. 8. ©ie Corner fatten 
biele ©otter. 9. £aben ©ie bie Meiber meiner Gutter ge= 
fefyen? 10. ^a, unb fie finb fefyr fcfyon. 11. ©inb beine 
93iicf)er autf) neu? 12. SBorauf i)at ergeftanben? 13. ©ie 
3Jfdnner fonnten foldje ©d;(offer nid^t bauen. 14. $n toetcfyem 
9Jlonat finb toir gefommen ? 15. i§aft bn nnr jtoftlf ©lafer 
auf bem £ifd)e? 16. S)er 2Mb ift grofj, unb biele Sdume 
toadjfen barin. 

1. He had ten pictures in his room. 2. We shall 
teach you to-morrow. 3. The children are eating meat 
and eggs. 4. Can you lead my brother home? 5. We 
have the glasses, but there is no water in them. 6. I 
can bake the cakes to-morrow. 7. Which houses will 
you buy? 8. He has given his sons the hats and the 
shoes. 9. They had also fallen into these errors. 
10. Yesterday the horses had nothing to eat. II. She 



46 GERMAN LESSONS. 

saw many birds in (auf) the fields. 12. No trees grov* 
in these valleys. 13. The pupils could not learn their 
lesson. 14. The girl has only two dresses. 15. In 
these shops they (man) speak German and English. 
16. Do you hear the songs of the children? 



LESSON XII. 



WEAK DECLENSION. 

119. To this declension belong masculines in e of 
more than one syllable, about twenty monosyllabic mas- 
culines (which formerly ended in e), many foreign mas- 
culines accented on the last syllable; all feminines of 
more than one syllable not expressly provided for else- 
where, about sixty monosyllabic feminines. There are 
no neuters in the declension. The vowel is never mod- 
ified for the plural. The endings of the declension are 
as follows : — 



N. (c)n 

G. (e)n (e)n 

D. (e)n (e)n 

A. (e)n (e)n 

120. Declension of nouns of the weak declension:— 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



47 



frer Stnabt, the boy bie 23fame, the flower bic <Stf)toefter, the sister 



N. ber £nabe 

G. be3 $naben 

D. bem $naben 

A. ben Knaben 



SINGULAR. 

bie SBlitme 
ber 33tume 
ber 33Iume 
bie 331ume 



bie ©cfytoefter 
ber ©cf)rt>efter 
ber ©cfytoefter 
bie ©cfytoefter 



N. bie ^naben 

G. ber $naben 

D. ben ^naben 

A. bie ilnabert 



bie 33lumen 
ber Slutnen 
ben 33tumen 
bie Slumen 



bie ©cfytoeftem 
ber ©djtoeftem 
btn ©cfytoeftern 
bie ©djtoeftern 



121. Like ©djtoefter are declined feminines in el and 
er. Feminines in in double the n in the plural. Thus : 
bie Sonigin, pi. bie ®oniginnen. |)err, Lord, master, 
gentleman, is declined with n through the singular and 
en through the plural. Thus : ber §err f be3 §erm, etc. ; 
pi. bie §erren f etc. 

122. Decline according to the weak declension $rctu, 
©abet, 93tnme, greunbin, S£ante, (Strafe, 9)}nfil, £inte, 
Stufgabe, Uf)r, Sonigin, 9Jo[e r 3Bod)e ; also ber 9£effe, the 
nephew, ber ©tubenf , the student, ber SKenfd), {the) man, 
human being, ber ©rctf, the count, bie ©pradje, the Ian- 
guage, bie Sriicfe, the bridge, bie (£rbe, the earth, ground, 
bie 3eit, the time. 

COMPOUND NOUNS. 

123. Compound nouns have the gender and declen- 
sion of their last component only, the remainder of 
the compound being unchanged in the course of declen- 



48 GERMAN LESSONS. 

sion. Thus : ber StpfelDcmm, the apple-tree, is declined 
like SBaum, not like ^tpfel, its plural being StyfelMume. 
There are only a few exceptions to this statement. 

124. It being presumed that the rules for the division of nouna 
into classes have been mastered, the student will be expected in 
most cases to know the proper class of any new noun. The plural 
of nouns will be noted in the vocabularies only when the rules al- 
ready given do not apply. Unless expressly noted in the vocabu- 
laries all masculine monosyllables are to be declined in the second 
class with umlaut in the plural, if the stem-vowel is capable of mod- 
ification ; all monosyllabic neuters in the third class with umlaut in 
the plural ; all feminines, whether monosyllabic or polysyllabic, un- 
less expressly provided for in the rules, in the weak declension. 

%ZX AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

125. When emphatic, ber standing' before a noun is 
often used as a demonstrative adjective in the sense of 
this, that, its declension being as in § 54. It is also 
used, when standing alone, as a demonstrative pronoun 
in the sense of this, that (also this or that one, he, ete.) t 
and is then declined as follows : — 





SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 


N. 


ber bie 


ba3 


bie 


G. 


beffen (bee) beren (ber) 


beffen (be3) 


beren (berer) 


D. 


bem ber 


bem 


benen 


A. 


ben bie 


ba3 


bie 



126. Observe that the German regularly uses the 
neuter btefe3 (generally simply bie3) and bct£ with the 
singular or plural of feitt when followed by a predi- 
cate noun. Thus: bie3 ift nteute greunbm, this is my 



DECLENSION" OF NOUNS. 49 

friend; ba§ ftttb Styfet, those are apples. (For the use 
of bet instead of the demonstrative with prepositions, see 
§ n8.) 

VOCABULARY. 

breijefjn, thirteen em unb gtpanjtg, twenty-one 

Merjeljn, fourteen mogen (§ 250), may, to like 

fftttfjetjlt, fifteen bluljcn, to bloom 

fed^jefju, sixteen inn (§ 248), /# do 

ftebjetjn, seventeen fiegen, (§ 239), /<? /z> 

adjtje^n, eighteen S^tgen, & ^w 

neunjefyn, nineteen mtt (dat.), wzY/z 

jtoemgig, twenty ntdjt iualjr ? w #*/ #0/ #w (^) 

EXERCISE XII. 

1. 2)ie Ufyren lagen auf bem STifd^e* 2. 2)er $onig fann 
Diele ©pradjen fyredjen. 3. $n jenen Qtitm lebte fein SJJenfd) 
auf bcr ©rbe. 4. 3)ie 9kffen be§ ©rafen finb aud; ©tuben- 
ten, nid)t tncdjr? 5. S)er £>err roirb ba§ nid^t tun. 6. 
28e(d)e 95Iunten Milken in Sfyrem (Sarten? 7. S)ie @(^tt)e= 
ftern ber Sontgtn fjaben auci) ©djtoffer. 8. ®er Secret f)at ben 
Jtnaben bie Siicfyer gejetgt. 9. 6t mag ba8 SBrottrtc^fc 10. 
Sftein $reunb ift mit mir uber bie 33rude gegangen. 11. ©a3 
finb bie greunbinnen feiner ©cr)rt>efter. 12. 23or fcrierjefm 
£agen iauften ftrir biefe ©abetn. 13. ©ie grauen toaren nidjt 
ju £aufe. 14. SDie .gerren finb bie ©ctfte tneine3 23etter£, 
nicfyt tvafyx ? 15. 2)ie tauten be£ ^naben finb jung unb 
fd^fim 16. SDie ©tabt tyat biele ©trafcen, unb fie finb fefyr 
lang. 

I. Many flowers were blooming in the forest. 2. We 
shall go with you to-morrow. 3. Did you see the birds 



50 GERMAN LESSONS. 

in the apple-trees ? 4. Those gentlemen are your friends, 
are they not (nidjt toarjr) ? 5. The students will learn 
our language. 6. Yesterday we had twenty-four plates. 
7. We were standing upon the bridge. 8. Her aunt 
showed he/ the watch and the hat. 9. Who is that ? 
That is my mother. 10. These are not their forks. 

11. The merchant showed the pictures [to] the count. 

12. There are many cities and villages upon the earth. 

13. William did this, but we did not hear him. 14. My 
nephews will sing the piece to-day. 15. We could see 
the paintings every day. 16. The boys can read Eng- 
lish, but they cannot speak it. 



LESSON XIII 



IRREGULAR DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

127. S)er Sftcrme, the name, and several other mascu- 
line nouns, often drop n, or en, of the nominative singu- 
lar, but retain it elsewhere. Thus : £)er Sftctme, bc3 9fa- 
nten3, bent Mermen, etc. ; pi., bte SRamen, etc. %o& £)erj, 
the heart, is treated in the same way, but has the accusa- 
tive like the nominative. Thus : ba3 ^erj, be£ ^erjen^, bent 
^erjen, ba§ §erj; pi., bte «£)erjen, etc. A list of these 
words with defective stems is in the Appendix, § 233. 

128. 3)er 9?acf)6ar, the neighbor, and ber SSetter repre- 
sent a small number of masculine and neuter nouns 
which make their singular according to the first declen- 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 5 I 

sion and their plural according to the second. Thus : 
ber 9lad)hax, be3 Sftadjbar^, etc., but bie 9?ad}bant r etc. 
These words make up what is known as the mixed de- 
clension. See Appendix, § 234. 

129. Words compounded with Sftcrmt form their 
plural with Seute, people y when taken collectively. Thus: 
^aufmcmn, pi, ^aufleute. But the plural is formed with 
Scanner when reference is made to individuals only, not 
to a class. 

FOREIGN NOUNS. 

130. Foreign nouns are variously declined. Some 
keep the declension of the language from which they 
come ; others are declined in part as German words ; 
but most foreign nouns, even when they retain their 
foreign accent, are fully declined like German nouns. 
Of those partly Germanized, observe that nouns in am 
or ium change urn to en in the plural, and those in at or 
tf add iert in the plural, the genitive singular ending in $. 
Thus: ba£ ©tubtum, study, be3 @tubtum3, pi., bie @tu- 
bten; ba3 SDHnerat', mineral, be3 9Kinerat3, pi., bie Wv 
nera'Iten. 

DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 

131. Proper names are inflected like common nouns, 
unless they are the names of persons, places (towns, 
etc.), or neuter names of countries. 

132. Names of persons, if declined, usually take £ for 
the genitive, the other cases being like the nominative ; 



52 GERMAN LESSONS. 

but feminine names in e and masculines ending in a sibi- 
lant take en3 for the genitive. Thus : SBityetntS, ©ft* 
fa&etljS, ©djtHerS ; but Wla£m$, 9ftarten3. The dative and 
accusative of both genders formerly ended in (e)tt, but 
this ending is now generally omitted. 

133. Names of persons are not usually inflected, if 
preceded by the article. Thus : be3 SBtttjetm, ber Sftctrte. 

134. Names of countries and places form their geni- 
tive in 8 J if they end in a sibilant, they make no geni- 
tive, but indicate the relation by the preposition fcott, 
or some other device. The construction with t)ort may 
take the place of the genitive of the names which 
can add %, and is the regular construction after the 
names of sovereigns, rulers, etc. 

Note. — Further details will not be given here. The use of the 
apostrophe ,with sibilants instead of the termination of the genitive 
and the occasional formation of other cases and the plural are left to 
the advanced grammar. 

NOUNS OF WEIGHT AND MEASURE. 

135. Masculine and neuter nouns of weight, meas- 
ure, quantity, or extent usually stand in the singular 
after numerals. Thus: brei $)3funb SaffcC But brei 
Saffen ftajfcc 

136. As has already been illustrated in various 
sentences, after nouns of weight, measure, quantity, 
or extent the noun designating the substance meas- 
ured is ordinarily not put in the genitive, but remains 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. S3 

uninflected. Thus : bret Xaffert Saffee, em @ta3 SBaffer. 
But if the noun is preceded by an adjective, it is put 
in the genitive (or sometimes t)Ott with the dative is 
used) . Thus : eme ^tctfdje roten 3Beme3. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber |>aufe (§ 127), the heap bte ©djtoetj, Switzerland 

ber Untertcm (§ 128), the (bag) ©ngfortb, England 

subject (ba£) ©eutfdjfanb, Germany 

ber Saffee, the coffee (ba3) SpartS, Paris 

ber SBctn, the wine ba$ $Pfunb (pi., Spfunbc), the 
ber SRfyein, the Rhine pound 

bte Saffe, fir ^«/ flte^en, f. (§ 246), to flow 

bte ^tafclje, ^ &?#/* tabeln, censure, blame 

(bte) SRarte, J/#;j Don (dzt), from, of 

exercise xm. 

1. SBtete ©table £)eutfcfylanb3 finb grofc getoorben. 2. 2)ie 
©trafeen bon tyaxiz finb fel;r fcfjon. 3. feabtn ©ie tyeute 
Sfyre -Jtacfybam gefefyen? 4. 9Jtarien§ 33ater lebt in ber 
©cfytoeij. 5. £)iefe3 SBaffer toirb in ben 5tt)ein fliefcen. 6. 
©ie^onigin fcon @ngtanb tyat fefyr t)iete Untertanen. 7. 2BiI= 
fyelm3 Sruber fyat biefen £aufen $fyfet gefauft. 8. @§ tnar 
ein $nabe 5Ratnen3 9Jla^. 9. £)er Sefyrer tabelte bte ©cfytoefter 
ber ©ertrub. 10. @r ift bon ber ©tabt Sonbon gefommen. 
n. 2Bie biele STaffen ^affee $at ber SBityelm getyabt? 12. 
Sene £erren finb Kaufleute unb nicr)t ©tubenten. 13. @r 
^eigte un3 ba§ §erj be£ £tere§. 14. SDicfc SJtineralien lagen 
in ber @rbe. 15. 2)ie SBetlcfyen ■ blutyen tmter bem 2fyfelbaum. 
16. ©ie fyradj nur fcon folcfyen ©tubien. 



54 GERMAN LESSONS. 

I. The Rhine flows through Germany. 2. William's 
father bought a shop in the village. 3. Where did 
you find this heap of minerals? 4. His brothers are 
merchants in London. 5. The dog ran from the street 
into Max's house. 6. Elizabeth's cousins will live in 
the city [of] Paris. 7. Give them five bottles of wine. 
8. I heard the name of your neighbor. 9. He had 
eight pounds of coffee and three pairs of shoes. 
10. They led the horse of the count through the 
streets of London. 1 1. He was in the room, but he did 
not remain in it. 12. This flower grows only in (the) 
Switzerland. 13. The subjects of the king love and 
praise him. 14. Our hearts laughed and sang. 15. 
They will censure Mary's friend. 16. The servant laid 
two bottles of this wine upon the table. 



LESSON XIV, 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

137. Adjectives when used in predicate or apposi- 
tively (that is, after the noun) are not declined; but 
adjectives used attributively (that is, before a noun ex- 
pressed or understood) are declined. There are two 
declensions of adjectives, the strong and the weak (or 
the first and the second) ; and under certain circum- 
stances there is a combination of the two, which we may 
call the mixed declension. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 55 

STRONG DECLENSION. 

138. Adjectives belong to the strong declension when 
they are not preceded by one of the articles or by some 
other (declinable) limiting word (such as jeber, betn, 
etc.). The terminations of the strong declension are 
the same as those of btefer (cf. § 58) ; but the genitive 
singular, masculine and neuter, of the adjective gener- 
ally ends in en, rather than e3, when the genitive of the 
noun ends in (e)3. This avoids repetition of the same 
form. 

139. Declension of Item with a noun of each gender : 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. Heiner Saum Heine 33aume 

G. Hemes (Heinen) 33aume£ Heiner 33aume 

D. Heinem Saume Heinen Sciumen 

A. Heinen Saum Heine Saume 

N. Heine ©tabt Heine ©table 

G. fleiner ©tabt Reiner ©tabte 

D. Seiner ©tabt Heinen ©tauten 

A. Heine ©tabt Heine ©tabte 

N. HeineS $au8 Heine £>aufer 

G. fleiner (Heinen) £aufe£ Slein-er £aufer 

D. Heinem fiaufe Heinen £aufern 

A. fleineS £au£ Heine £aufer 

DECLENSION OF CARDINAL NUMERALS. 

140. The cardinal numerals are usually not declined. 
When an adjective, ettt is inflected like the indefinite 
article ; standing alone, it is inflected like btefer, the 



56 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



nominative being enter, erne, eine£ (or commonly em3). 
Say em3 (not etn) , Jtoei, etc., when merely counting. With 
ber the declension of etn is like that of any other adjec- 
tive (ber erne, etc.; see Lesson XV.). 9ftillton is also 
regularly inflected as a feminine of the weak declension, 



VOCABULARY. 



ber @tntooI)tter r (pi.,- toot)* 
ner), the inhabitant 

bte ffibev, the feather, pen 

bie SEafdje, the pocket 

ba3 Satyr (pi., Satyre), the 
year 

bte ^leiber, the clothes, 
clothing 

breifetg, thirty 

oierjig, forty 

ffafeig, fifty 

fedjjtfl, sixty 
fiebjtg, seventy 



actytjig, eighty 

neunjig, ninety 

fyunbert, hundred 

fyunbert unb eut^, one hundred 

and one 
taujenb, thousand 
(bte) HRtttton, million 
fc^retben (§ 245), to write 
mitffeu (§ 250), must, to have 

to 
oft, often 
arm, poor 
retd), rich 



EXERCISE XIV. 

1. S)a3 $inb mufc neue ©ctyu^e fyaben. 2. 2Bilfyelm3 SSatet 
ift fe§r arm. 3. @r fyatte jtoei Heine Ufyren in ber £afcf)e. 
4. ^ener 3ftanrt fauft nur alte £teiber. 5. Sonbon fyat trier 
3Mtonen ©intooljmer. 6. 2Bir fcfyreiben mit flemen gebern 
unb fdjtoarser £inte. 7- ®* toar funfjtg Safyre alt. 8. SDie 
©dime reiser 23ater toerben oft arm. 9. Saute ber Sdjneiber 
jtoei £aufer obernurein3? 10. ©te lief fcon tljrem SSater 
ju ifyrer Gutter. 11. 2)ie3 finb toetfee unb gratte £itte. 12. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 57 

9Bir fyabm geftem rote Slumen im SBalbe gefefyen. 13. Dft 
i&t man fdjtoarjteS) ©rot in ©eutjcfjlanb. 14. ©ie fatten eine 
glafcfye alten 2Beine8. 15. £a&en ©ie junge ^Pferbe? 9tan, 
id) fyabt nur alte. 16. alter greunb, id? toerbe bid) morgen 
fe^en. 

1. There are thirty days in a month. 2. We eat 
only white bread. 3. The houses of rich men are often 
very beautiful. 4. Among the guests were pretty boys 
and girls. 5. He had to learn his lesson. 6. Give me 
two bottles of new wine. 7. Have you red and blue 
flowers? I have only white [ones]. 8. These pockets 
are very large. 9. Were they rich or poor? 10. The 
castles of Germany are often large. 1 1 . The inhabi- 
tants of Paris can see beautiful pictures. 12. Did you 
write with blue ink? 13. Those birds have black 
feathers. 14. I shall buy new books and clothes to- 
morrow. 15. This city will have two million inhabi- 
tants. 16. In the year 1 887 we saw the queen in London. 



LESSON XV. 



WEAK DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

141. An adjective preceded by ber, or by one of the 
words declined like ber (cf. § 60) belongs to the weak 
declension. The student will meet with other limiting 
words (such as triete, etrttge) which may cause the ad- 







SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


N. 


t 


t 


t 


G. 


en 


en 


en 


D. 


en 


en 


en 


A. 


en 


e 


e 



58 GERMAN LESSONS. 

jective to be of the weak declension. If such words are 
inflected, it is always safe to decline the adjectives weak, 
as the purpose of adjective inflection is to show the 
gender, number, and case of the noun only when a pre- 
ceding limiting word has not already done so. 

142. The endings of the weak declension are as fol- 
lows : — 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. Neut 

en 
en 
en 
en 

143. Observe that the ending is c in five places, but is elsewhere 
en. Adjectives ending in el, en, er may reject the e either of these 
terminations or of the declensional ending en (cf. § 64). 

144. Declension of a weak adjective with a noun of 
each gender : — 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. ber junge 9Kann bie jungen 3Jtanner 

G. be£ jungcn 5JJanne£ ber jungen Scanner 

D. bem jungen SWanne ben jungen Tlanmxn 

A. ben jungen SKann bie jungen Scanner 

N. bie junge grau bie jungen $rauen 

G. ber jungen grau ber jungen grauen 

D. ber jungen grew ben jungen grauen 

A. bie junge grew bie jungen $rauen . 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 59 

N. ba£ junge ^Pferb bie jungen ^Pferbe 

G. be£ jungen ^3ferbe£ ber jungen ^Pferbe 

D. bem jungen ^Sferbe ben jungen ^Sferben 

A. bag junge ^Bferb bie jungen ^Sferbe 

145. Two or more adjectives under the same circum- 
stances will be treated alike. Thus: tcmge, graue Slet- 
ber ; bie tangen, grauen ®(eiber. The declension of the 
adjective is the same whether the noun is expressed or 
understood. When an adjective is used as a noun, it is 
still declined as an adjective, but must begin with a capi- 
tal. Thus : ber Sltte, the old man ; bie SIrmen, the poor. 
Participles when used as adjectives are declined like 
other adjectives. Thus: bie fingenben SSogel, ba3 gefal* 
lene SMatt 

TRANSPOSED ORDER. 

146. Subordinate clauses regularly have the personal 
verb the last word in the clause. See sentences 6, n, 
I j, in Exercise XV. This arrangement of words is 
known as the transposed order, and differs from the 
other orders in the position of the personal verb. Ob- 
serve that a subordinate clause must always be cut off 
from the rest of the sentence by a comma, or commas. 
(See also §219). 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ©ommer, the summer furj, short 

ber SBinter, the winter fait, cold 

ber gritljling, the spring ttKirm, warm 



60 GERMAN LESSONS. 

ber |)erbft, the autumn freimblicf), friendly 

ber 2)eutfd)e (§ 145 ), the gut, good 

German etmge, some 

\)a$ papier' the paper je£t, now 

tooHen (§ 250), will) to wish, balb, soon 

purpose tote, hoiv 

beutfcl), German baJ3, that (conj.) 

angenefjm, pleasant, agreeable toeil r because 

EXERCISE xv. 

1. 3n feinen £afd)en fanben fair einige rotert Sfyfel. 2. 
feabm ©ie bag toevfee papier gefauft ? 3. ©r toill nur beutfcfye 
33ucfyer lefen. 4. 3Me grofcen ©tabte finb tnir nic^t ange- 
nefjm. 5- 3$ lobe biefe jungen £inber, toeit fie gut finb. 
6. @g tft gut, baft fie bag furje Sieb fang. 7. $n ben langen 
£agen beg Sommerg toerben toir oft in ben fcfybnen 28alb 
gefyen. 8. £)er freunblidje junge Sftann gab i^r bag neue 
33ucf). 9. ©ie S)eutfcf)en lieben fefyr bie SWufif. 10. 28ie 
biele toarmen ^ucfyen l)aft bu gegeffen? 11. ©r toirb balb 
fommen, toeil er ung feine neue Ufyr jeigen nrill. 12. 3m 
SBintcr fyabm ftrir furje £age unb lange -ftadjte. 13. 28ir 
muftten geftern ju £aufe bleibcn, tueil eg fait toar. 14. ©er 
©ofm unfereg geticbten greunbeg ift ^eute geftorben. 15. @te 
tootten brei neue £aufer bauen. 16. SHc ©caitiff el ber Ileinen 
dimmer finb in meiner £afcfye. 

1. We had some small tables in the room. 2. 
Which tailor made your new coat? 3. German is the 
language of the Germans. 4. The warm days of (the) 
autumn are very pleasant [to] us. 5. I shall soon see 
the friendly faces of your brothers. 6. We could not 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 6 1 

find him, because he is now in London. 7. Is the paper 
that (tt>etd)e3) you bought yesterday red or blue? 8. In 
(the) spring the violets will bloom. 9. We shall not 
learn the long lesson to-day. 10. Those white flowers 
are not pretty. 11. We bought these German pictures 
in Paris. 12. They were not willing to live in the large 
city. 13. How many large rooms have you in your 
new house? 14. This small village has only short 
streets. 15. The meat of such young animals is not 
good. 16. We saw that your cousin was standing be- 
hind the chair. 



LESSON XVI. 



MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

147. After ein and the words declined like eirt (cf. § 64) 
the adjective is partly of the strong and partly of the 
weak declension. In the three places of the singular 
where these words have no ending (masculine and neu- 
ter nominative and neuter accusative), the adjective is 
strong; elsewhere in the singular and through the 
plural it is weak ; this so-called mixed declension is 
therefore not a separate declension, but merely a com- 
bination of the other two. 

148. Declension of an adjective with lettt and a noun 
of each gender; the endings in black-faced letters are 
strong, the others weak : — 



62 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



N. fein neuer &ut 

G. feine3 neuen JputeS 

D. f einem neuen £ute 

A. feinen neuen £ut 

N. feine neue ©abel 

G. feiner neuen ©abet 

D. feiner neuen ©abel 

A. feine neue ©abel 

N. fein neueg ittofter 

G. feinen neuen $lofter§ 

D. feinem neuen Softer 

A. fein neueg Softer 



feine neuen £jiite 
feiner neuen £)iite 
feinen neuen bitten 
feine neuen £ute 

feine neuen ©abeln 
feiner neuen ©abeln 
feinen neuen ©abeln 
feine neuen ©abeln 

feine neuen Softer 
feiner neuen Softer 
feinen neuen ^loftern 
feine neuen Softer 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

149. S)er and toelcf)er are the common relatives, rep- 
resenting who, which, or that. In the genitive only the 
forms of ber are used ; elsewhere the words are generally 
interchangeable. S)er is declined as in § 125, but has only 
beren in the genitive plural. 2Beld)er is thus declined : 







SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 


N. 


toeldjer 


roeldje 


toeldjeS 


toefdje 


G. 


(beffen) 


(beren) 


(beffen) 


(beren) 


D. 


toeldjem 


toelcfyer 


toefdjem 


toefdjen 


A. 


tnetdjen 


toeldje 


n>eldje£ 


tnelcfye 



150. 2Ber and tva$ (declined as in § 1 16) are used as 
compound relatives : toer means (he) who, whoever, 
etc., and ft)a3, that which, what, whatsoever, etc. (See 
also § 184.) 3Bo (tt)or) is substituted for toa3 (cf. §118) 
and often for the dative or accusative of other relatives, 
referring to things, when used with a preposition. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 63 

Note. — The relative pronoun should never be omitted nor should 
the preposition governing it be separated from it, as is often the case 
in English. The clause introduced by a relative is always subor- 
dinate and must therefore take the transposed order (§ 146). A 
verb dependent on a relative is put in the third person, even if the 
antecedent of the relative is a pronoun of the first or second person. 
But the verb may be put in the first or second person, if the pro- 
noun is repeated after the relative. Thus : 3d), ber id) bein greunb 
bin. 

ORDINAL NUMERALS. 

151. The ordinals are formed by adding t to the 
cardinal up to twenty (except erft, first, and britt, third) 
and ft from twenty on. Thus : jtoett, ctdjt, $ef)ttt, jtocm- 
jtgft, eutmtbjtocmjtgft, fiinfjigft, f)unbettft. They follow 
the rules for adjective inflection. 

(£3 atfct, e3 i|k 

152. (S3 gtbt, e3 gab, etc., with the accusative, may 
often signify there is, there are, there was, there were, 
etc. (£g gibt differs from e§ ift (e3 finb) in expressing 
what is more indefinite or in a more indefinite (larger) 
place, while e£ ift expresses what is definite or in a 
definite (small) place. Thus : @3 ift em SSogel in bein 
3tmmer ; e£ gibt triele guten $8ud)er, 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ©onntctg, Sunday gem fjaben, (have gladly), to 
ber Sftontag, Monday like 

ber SMettftag, Tuesday fdjfafen (§241), to sleep 

ber 93rief, the letter foHcn (250), shall, ought 



64 GERMAN LESSONS. 

bie fitting, the newspaper tragen (§ 240), to carry, wear 

ba3 Sanb, the land, country tneHettf)t', perhaps 

auf bent (ba§) 2a\\b,in(tnto) ctnft, once, formerly 

, the country fo, so 

grim, green gut, ze^// (adv.) 

mube, //ra/ 

EXERCISE XVI. 

1. ©oil id) am ©onntag mem neue3 ilteib tragen ? 2. 2)aS 
£ieb, toelcf)e3 fie geftem fang, toar fefyr furj. 3. £)a§ ift bein 
alter greunb, beffen 33iid^er id) fo oft gelefen fjabe. 4- ©ure 
fyiibfdfye $reunbin geE>t fyeute auf£ Sanb. 5. 3)er 9Kontag ift 
ber jtoeite Sag ber SSod^e tmb ber 2)ienftag ber britte. 6. ©ie 
fyaben unfere griinen Saume fefyr gem. 7. 2)ie3 ift ber jtoei= 
unbjtoanjtgfte 33rief r ben id) ifym gefcfyrieben fyabt. 8. ©r ift 
fo mube, bafc er nidjt gut fcfylafen !ann. 9. S)ie Corner fatten 
einft fefyr reicfye Sanber. 10. 2)a£ ift fcielleidjt fein junger 
©ruber, ber mit ifym gefommen ift. 11. ©§ gibt biete SKen^ 
fc^en, toetdje nic^t lefen uub fcfyreiben fonnen. 12. ©r fuc^t 
ben (Sngtanber, bem er einft biente. 13. ®er.£e^rer tabelte 
iljre fleinen ©cfytoeftem. 14. ^n ben geitungen lefen loir oon 
ben ^loftern, bie man jefet bauen toiH. 15. S)er ©raf jeigte 
ifynen fein grofteS ©djtoert. 16. 2Ber ba3 fagt, ift fein guter 
SKann. 

1. William the First was king of England. 2. They 
ought to buy his German books. 3. Perhaps it was 
your little guest who was eating the cake. 4. The 
children will wear their new clothes Tuesday. 5. To- 
morrow will be the thirtieth day of this month. 6. The 
poor woman of whom you were speaking died yesterday 



COMPARISON. 6$ 

7. Our cousin once (cf. §87) wore a white coat. 8. He 
wrote only a short letter because he was tired. 9. The 
teacher praised the pupil whose letter he had read. io. 
The Germans love their great country, n. They read 
their new piece well, but they could not sing the new 
songs. 12. Are these the violets which you planted in 
the garden? 13. These two boys are so young that 
they must remain at home 14. He laughs because his 
little brother likes the picture. 15. He who lives in the 
country can see the green fields. 16. Have you found 
the German newspapers which your nephew gave you ? 



LESSON XVII. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

153. Adjectives are compared by adding to the posi- 
tive er for the comparative and (e)ft for the superlative. 
Monosyllabic adjectives whose vowel is a, 0, or u (not 
an) generally modify the vowel in the comparative and 
superlative, but there are some such monosyllables 
which do not modify. 

154. Adjectives ending in e add only r for the com- 
parative; those in et, er, en drop the e of these termina- 
tions before er. The superlative regularly adds only ft, 
but after b, t, or a sibilant eft is generally added. The 
present participle, however, adds only ft. 



66 GERMAN "LESSONS. 

155. The following illustrate the rules just given :— 

fletn ftetrter ffetnft 

cmgenef)m angenetjmer angeneljmft 

jung jiingef jimgft 

alt alter alteft 

ebel, noble ebler ebelft 

furj fiirjer fiirjeft 

liar flarer ftarft 

156. The following adjectives are compared irregu- 
larly : — 

gut 6effer Beft 

t>tel metjr metft 

§oti) (i)ot) when f)ot)er t)5d6)ft 

inflected), high 

ttal), nigh, near natjer nacfjfi 

grofc grower grflfct 

157. Comparatives and superlatives follow the rules 
for adjective declension. Thus: altere 9Jianrier, ba$ lletnfte 
Stnb, mem jitngfter 95ruber. 

158. Unlike the positive and comparative, the super- 
lative can not be used in predicate in its uninflected 
form, but an adverbial phrase made up of am (an bem) 
and the dative of the superlative is used. Thus : 5m 
grilling finb bte SMume am fd)dnftert ; im SStnter finb bte 
Sage am litrjeftett. This form with am is, however, not 
used, if the adjective is not the real predicate ; that is. 
if the noun is understood, or if the superlative is modi- 



COMPARISON. 6'7 

fied by a phrase or clause. Thus : 2)tefe3 §au3 tft ba£ 
fd)on[te in ber ©tabt. 

159. ^ — as with the positive is translated by fo — 
tote, or eben fo (>#«* so) — tote. Sometimes ate is used 
instead of tote. Thus : (£r tft (ebett) fo grofc tote id) ; ber 
Saufmamt tft em ebett fo guter 2ftcmn tote betn SSater. In 
comparisons the English than is rendered by ate. Thus : 
SJtefer Sfrtabe tft jihtger ate fern ©ruber. 

FRACTIONALS. 

160. Fractional (except bte §atfte f the half) are 
formed by adding to the ordinal the termination tel (con- 
tracted from Sett, part) . Thus : ^8kxtd t fourth, quarter; 
gimftet, fifth ; 5Id)tet, eighth ; Qtyntd, tenth, etc. These 
words are all neuter nouns. Besides the noun §alfte 
German has also the adjective fjalb which may be in- 
flected as any other adjective. 

COUNTING TIME. 

161. In counting time the cardinal numbers are used 
with Ul)r (which is then treated as indeclinable) to ex- 
press the hours. Thus: em Uf)r, one o'clock; fteben 
Uljr, seven o'clock. The half hours and the quarters are 
counted forward. Thus : t)a(6 fed)3, ' half 'past five ; (etn) 
Stertet (auf) f ed)3 f a quarter past five ; bret SStertel (auf) 
[ed)<3, a quarter to six. The minutes may be expressed 
by ttadj and bor. Thus jtoattjtg Sftmuten ttad) ffittf, twenty- 
minutes past five ; ad)tjef)tt 9Kututett oor fed)3, eighteen 
minutes to six. Other prepositions used to express the 
minutes will be readily intelligible. 



68 GERMAN LESSONS. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber 9ftitttt)odj, Wednesday tote trie! Ut)r ift e£ ? what 

ber 3)onner3tag, Thursday o'clock is it? 

ber grettag, Friday um (ace), at (time of day) 

ber ©omtabenb, Saturday um bret Ut)r, at three o'clock 

ber Sopf, /A* A^rf fanft (comp., fanfter), soft, 

ber 3ucfer, the sugar gentle 

bie 9tofe, the journey fiif$, jk/^/ 

bie ®irfdje, ^ cherry amerifamfdj, American 

trinfeit (§ 237), fe <&**£ 

EXERCISE XVII. 

i. (Sinji toar er ber reicfyfte ^aufmann in ber ©taw ; jefet 
ift er firmer. 2. Sftfidjften ©onnabenb ftrirb ber ©tubent um 
fedj3 Ufyr fommen. 3. 2)ie beutfefyen ittrfctyen finb beffer unb 
filler ate bie amerifaniftfjen. 4. 6r ift ebenfo groft tote idj, 
aber id) bin filter ate er. 5. gtoei ©rittel unb ein ©ecfyftel 
finb je|itt 3tt>filftel. 6. S)ie ebelften 9ftenfd!)en finb oft nicfyt 
bie retcfyften.. 7. 3m ©mnmer finb bie £age am Ifingften unb 
bie Sftddjte am furjeften. 8. S)ie arme grau taufte nur ein 
tyalbeg ^5funb Qudtx. 9. S)er SWann fjat einen grofeeren Rop\ 
ate ber Slnabe. 10. SSie t>iel Utyr ift e3? @* ift breiunb: 
jtoanjig SJJinuten fcor jefyn. 11. 2lm greitag marten toir 
eine fleinere aber angenefymere Sleife. 12. S)ie jungere £ocf)= 
ter ift fanfter unb freunblicfyer ate bie filtere. 13. 3$ tranf 
nur bie £filfte be£ fu^eften 2Beine3. 14. 3#an fiefyt ben naljen 
SBalb mit f einen fyofym SBfiumen fefjr gem. 15. 2lm SDftttoocfy 
toar unfere £ante frfinfer ate am 9Kontag. 16. gtarte ift bie 
fcfyonere, aber Sonbon ift bie groftere unb reidjere ©tabt. 

I. Her youngest sister is very ill. 2. Will it soon be 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 69 

half past one o'clock? 3. His new coat is not as gray 
as his old [one]. 4. She is prettier than her friend. 
5. We have beautiful roses, but the roses in their gar- 
den are the most beautiful. 6. Next Thursday their 
youngest son will be twenty-one years old. 7. Our 
flowers are most beautiful in the spring. 8. Perhaps 
he is older than you, but he is not so large as you. 9. 
The gentle, friendly old man died on (the) Friday. 10. 
Can you come at three or a quarter past three? II. 
There was no sugar in the coffee which he was drinking. 
12. That dog is smaller than (the) most dogs. 13. 
On (auf) the journey we saw no better apples than our 
American [ones]. 14. This horse's head is the largest 
that I have seen. 15. The birds were eating the sweet- 
est and best cherries. 16. The nights are clearer in 
winter than in summer. 



LESSON XVIII. 



SUBJUNCTIVE OF fcrt&ett. 

162. The subjunctive mode differs from the indicative 
chiefly in regularly inserting e before consonantal end- 
ings (cf. § 72). The first and third person of the sin- 
gular are alike. The conjugation of the auxiliary fjabett. 
although offering some irregularities, is given first be- 
cause of the part this verb plays in the inflection of 
other verbs. 



70 



GERMAN LESSONS. 



163. Subjunctive of f)abeu : — 



id) f)abe f / may have, etc. 
bu tjabeft 
er ^abe 

tuir l)ctbeu 
fie J)abett 



id) E)Cttte f I might have, etc. 
bu pteft 

er f)titte 

tuir fatten 
if)r fyattet 
fie fatten 



PERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



id) f)abe gefjabt, / may have id) fjatte gefjabt, / might have 
had, etc. had, etc. 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



idj toerbe fjaben, / shall 

have, etc. 
bu toerbeft f)abeu 
er toerbe §ahm 
tuir toerbeu f)abeu 
tf)r toerbet fjaben 
fie toerbeu Ijabeu 



CONDITIONAL. 



id) toiirbe fjabeu, / should 

have, etc. 
bu ttmrbeft f)abeu 
er tuiirbe fjaben 
tuir ttmrben tjaben 
ifyr tuurbet fyabm 
fie toiirben tjaben 



id) tuerbe gefjabt fjabeu, / 

*£#// have had, etc. 
bu toerbeft ge^abt tjabeu 
er tuerbe gefjabt Ijabeu 
tuir tuerbeu gefjabt fyabeu 
if)r tuerbet getjabt.fjaben 
fie toerben gefjabt fjabeu 

CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) tuiirbe geljabt fjabeu, / 

should have had, etc. 
bu ttmrbeft gefjabt Ijabeu 
er tuiirbe gefjabt l)ahm 
tuir ttmrben gefjabt fjaben 
ifjr tuiirbet geljabt fjaben 
fie ttmrben getjabt fyahen 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 71 

USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

164. The translation given above for the subjunctive 
is merely intended to be suggestive. The German sub- 
junctive is so much more widely used than the English 
that subjunctive forms will have various translations. 
It often happens that the German subjunctive must be 
rendered by the English indicative or potential. And 
yet the essential nature of the subjunctive is the same 
in the two languages. It expresses possibility, doubt, 
uncertainty, etc. 

165. The fact that the subjunctive denotes possibility, 
doubt, etc., leads to its use in suppositions contrary 
to fact. In the clause of condition (that is, the if 
clause, the protasis) the preterit or pluperfect subjunctive 
is used ; in the result or conclusion (the apodosis) the 
preterit or pluperfect subjunctive is used, or for them 
may be substituted the forms of the conditional. See 
sentences 3 and 8 in Exercise XVIII. 

166. German also uses the subjunctive in indirect 
discourse, where the sentiments and not the exact words 
of another are given.. As a rule, use the tense that 
would be used in the direct discourse. If this rule should 
call for a form which cannot be distinguished from the 
corresponding form of the indicative, then change from 
the present to the preterit subjunctive, etc. See sen- 
tences 1, 4, 6, 10, and 13 in Exercise XVIII. 



72 GERMAN LESSONS. 

THE CONDITIONAL. 

167. The conditional tenses are formed by the pre- 
terit subjunctive of tuerben with the infinitive, simple and 
compound. They therefore bear the same relation to 
the two futures as the preterit to the present, and cor- 
respond in meaning to the preterit and pluperfect sub- 
junctive respectively. They may be substituted for these 
tenses, as noted in §165, in the conclusion of a suppo- 
sition contrary to the fact; also elsewhere when these 
tenses would be the same in form in the indicative and 
the subjunctive. In the same way the conditional may 
take the place of the future, when the future indicative 
and subjunctive are alike. See sentences 3 and 8 in 
Exercise XVIII. 

INVERTED ORDER AFTER SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 

168. In agreement with the statement in § 102, the 
principal clause must have the inverted order, if the sub- 
ordinate clause precedes. See sentences 7 and 8 in 
Exercises XVIII. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber 2lmertfaner, (pi., -faner) idj modjte gent, / should like 

the American to 

ber Dnfet, the uncle bitrfen (§250), may, to be per- 
bte ©cfjule, the school mitted, dare 

bie Strcf)e, the church burtf) (ace), through 

ba3 SBetter, the weather 511, too 

bie Seute, the people roenn (cf. § 219), if $ when 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 73 

frangofifcf), French' bod), though, nevertheless, cer* 
englifd), English tainly, surely, I think, you 

fdjtedjt, bad know, etc. 

arttg, well-behaved, good 

EXERCISE XVIII. 

i. ©ttfafctf) facjt r ba$ fie tmr franjofifdje SBii^er f)a6e. 
2. 2)a3 Slinb motf)te gem jur ©djute gefyen, aber ba£ ^Better 
ift ju fct)IedE)t. 3. 28ir fatten einen beffern 2)iener (or ttmt> 
ben — Ijaben), menu ttrir 3Bil()e(m fatten. 4. Sftein better, 
fagte, ba§ bie Seute fdjtedjte $)3ferbe fatten. 5. 2)ie Studjen 
toaren bod) fefjr gut. 6. Unfer Dnfel fdjrieb, bafe er Sftaj 
fet)r gern f)abe. 7. SBemt tt)ir burcf) ben 3Batb jur ®ird)e 
gefjen, fo fefyen toir bie fd)onften 33oget. 8. 2Benn ttrir fd)fc 
nere Sage gefyabt fatten, fo fatten ttrir eine angenefjmere 
3Jeife gefyabt (or toitrben ttrir — gefjabt fjaben). 9. Sn ber 
©c£)ule biirfen bie ®inber ntc£)t tacfyen. 10. @r fagt, baft er 
in bem neuen §aufe toofjnen toerbe. 11. 2)a3 gimmer toar 
nid)t toarm, tuetl ber Dfen ju !tein tear. 12. 3d) mod)te gent 
biefe t)ii6fd)e llt)r nadj £>auS netjmen. 13. HRein SSater fagte 
mir, baft bu artige Stinber Ijabeft. .14. SDie engtifd)en Qti* 
tungen finb beffer alS bie beutfdjen. 15. ©er ?Xmertfaner 
fdjrieb feinem greunbe, bafc er jtoei alte ©ematbe fyabz. 16. 
2lm ©onnabenb tear er !ranl unb !onnte nid)t3 effen. 

1. May she show me your new spoons and forks? 
2. Gertrude says that she has a blue dress. 3. Would 
you have a better dog, if you had the black [one] ? 
4. Such people surely ought not to come. 5. We 
should like to lie under the tall trees in this green 



74 GERMAN LESSONS. 

valley. 6. Our friend wrote that she had more than 
twenty rooms in her house. 7. When the children are 
in the country, (so) they are well-behaved. 8. They 
would have liked me, if I had had better clothes. 9. If 
the weather is not too bad, (so) we [shall] go to (the) 
school next Monday. 10. He said that he would have 
two French paintings next week. 11. (The) most 
Americans have often read about (t)Ott) the great Eng- 
lish castles. 12. The teacher said that the old cities 
had once had many inhabitants. 13. The dog came 
out of the garden and ran through the house, did it not 
(nidjt toafjr) ? 14. Your brother said that you had had 
larger hammers than these. 15. The children were 
permitted to wear their new clothes to (the) church. 
16. On Thursday I wrote a short letter [to] your uncle. 



LESSON XIX. 



SUBJUNCTIVE OF WEAK AND STRONG VERBS.^ 

169. The present and preterit tenses of the subjunc- 
tive of weak verbs differ from the same tenses of the in- 
dicative only in making the third singular of the present 
end in e, and in uniformly retaining e before consonantal 
endings. The present subjunctive of strong verbs is like 
that of weak verbs, the vowel of the second and third per- 
sons singular never being changed; but the preterit 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



75 



subjunctive of these verbs adds e for the first and third 
persons singular, and modifies the vowel, if possible, 
for all the forms of the tense. The compound tenses 
of the subjunctive are formed with the subjunctive of 
the auxiliaries. 

170. Subjunctive of a weak and a strong verb : — - 



id) lobe, I may praise, etc. 

bu tobeft 

er lobe 

toir tobeu 

ifyr tobet 

fie loben 

PRETERIT. 

id) lobte, / might praise, etc. 

bu lobteft 

er lobte 

toir lobten 

tf)r lobtet 

fie lobten 



id) gebe, / may give^ etc. 

bu gebeft 

er gebe 

ttur geben 

it)r gebet 

fie geben 

PRETERIT. 

id) gabe, I might give, etc. 

bu gabeft 

er gabe 

ttrir gaben 

tf)r gabet 

fie gaben 



id) f)abe gelobt, / may have 
praised, etc. 



PLUPERFECT. 



id) fjatte gelobt, / might 
have praised, etc. 



id) tjabe gegeben, / may have 
given^ etc. 



PLUPERFECT. 



id) fjatte gegeben, / might have 
given, etc. 



idj tuerbe loben, / shall 
praise, etc. 



id) tuerbe geben, / shall give, 
etc. 



76 GERMAN LESSONS. 

FUTURE PERFECT. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe gelobt. fjabert, / idj tuerbe gegeben fja&ert, I shall 
shall have praised, etc. have given , etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 4 CONDITIONAL. 

id) tDltrbe loben, / should id) ttmrbe ge6en, I should give, 
praise, etc. etc. 

CONDITIONAL PERFECT. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) ttmrbe gelobt ijabm, I jti) ttmrbe gege6en tyaben, / 
should have praised, etc. should have given, etc. 

USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

171. The nature and force of the subjunctive (cf. 
§ 164) lead to its use commonly in clauses to express 
purpose after bafy, bamtt (in order that, so thai). See 
sentences 2 and 1 1 in Exercise XIX. 

172. The subjunctive is also naturally employed in 
expressing wishes, requests, etc. See sentences 3 and 8 
in Exercise XIX. 

THE DAY OF THE MONTH. 

173. The day of the month is expressed by the or- 
dinal, and, by abbreviation, the name of the month is 
left unchanged after the numeral. Thus: S3 ifi ber 
jefjttte Sanuctr. Corresponding to the English use of on 
or of the simple objective in naming dates, the German 
employs an bent (generally contracted to am) or the 
simple accusative with the definite article. Thus : am 
fitnften 9ftarj, bm fitnften 9#arj. The latter form is es- 
pecially employed in dating letters. When figures are 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 77 

used, the dates may be written thus : ant {or ben) 5ten 
aftarj, am {or ben) 5. atfarj. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber Sanuar' , January ber Se^ember, December 

bcr gebraar', February ber toieotelfte, z#>W d#jj/ (0/ 

ber SRftrj, March the month) 

bcr Stprif, ^4/rzY Oorig,/<?r;^T, last 

ber Sftat, J/^7 arbeiten, to work, labor 

ber Su'nt, .///«* fdjon, already 

ber Su'ft, /«/p je, femafe, *z^r 

ber 9tuguft' r August me, niemat3, 7^^r 

ber September, September lange (adv.), long, for a long 

ber October, October time 

ber SJioOember, November afe, when, as (cf. §219) 

EXERCISE XIX. 

1. SSenn bent ©djttwger ben Saben nidjt frfjon gefauft 
tjatte, jo fatten loir e3 gerfjan. 2. SKein SXJcffe arbeitet fyente 
fefjr lange, bamit er morgen md)t arbeiten mitffc. 3. Sange 
(ebe ber gute alte Sonig. 4. SDen toieoielftcn Ijaben loir 
t)ente? @£ tft ber breifetgfte 9(priL 5. life roir Oorigen 
©onntag jur $irtf)e gingen, faljert mtr t>a$ ftetne SWabdjen. 

6. ©cine SRad)barn fagtcn, ban ber SJfann fcin §crj fjabe. 

7. §aft bit ifym je gefdjrieben, bafe er fommen barf? 8. 
Sftoge er nie in btefen Srrtnm fallen. 9. S)er Sannar ift ber 
erfte unb ber Suni ber fedjfte 3Ronat be3 SaljreS. 10. S)er 
Sonig toiH, ba$ ber @raf tjente fommc. 11. 2)er @d)filer 
fyat bie Stufgabe gnt geternt, bamit tf)n ber Setjrer lobe. 12. 
©octfic ftarb am 22. 3Jifirj 1832 in 2Seimar. 13. ©er Snabe 



78 GERMAN LESSONS. 

fagtp bafe bu ben SSogel fd^on gefangen fjatteft. 14. w 9Kufif ! 
9Jhiftf!" fagte ber Sontg, „bamtt tdj mcf)t fyore, ma3 fie 
fagen!" 15. fatten @te etnen tangent SBricf gefdjrieben, 
tuenn ©tc bte gett gel)a6t ptten ? 16. 91m erften Suit mx* 
ben rotr ju |mufe fetn. 

1. May you never praise a worse man! 2. On 
March 1, 1871, Paris fell into the hands ot the Germans. 
3. If his father had praised him, he would have worked 
well. 4. Her aunt wrote, "You must come to-day-" 
5. Say to him that he must go to-morrow. 6. When 
we were in England last July, we had to wear our warm 
clothing. 7. Would you have given the watch to me, 
if you had not already given it to your nephew? 
8. What day of the month is it* to-day? It is Tues- 
day, December 8, 1891. 9. She said that the man had 
been standing for a long time. 10. Schiller died on 
May 9, 1805. 11. Who said that I ever censured 
him? 12. He came in order that he might show us" 
the wagon. 13. We read in the newspaper that you 
had built a new house. 14. [Let] the subject serve the 
king. 15. The boy goes to school that he may learn. 
16. As he lay under the tree, he heard the bird sing 

* See sentence 4 in the German exercise. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



79 



LESSON XX. 



SUBJUNCTIVE OF fettt. 

174. Subjunctive of fetn : — 



id) fet, / may be, etc. 
bu feteft 

er fei 

ttur feien 
ifjr feiet 
fie feien 



PRETERIT. 

id) tocire, / might be, etc 
bu ttmreft 
er mare 

fair tociren 
itjr ludret 
fie toaren 



PERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



id) fei.geluefen, I may have id) toare getoefen, / might 
been, etc. have been, etc. 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



idj tuerbe fetn, / shall be y tdj toerbe getoefen fetn, / 
etc. shall have been, etc. 



CONDITIONAL. 



CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 



id) toitrbe fetn, / should be, id) ttmrbe gemefen fetn, I should 
etc. have been, etc. 



80 GERMAN LESSONS. 

175. Subjunctive of toerben : — 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

id) toerbc, / may become, etc. id) toiirbe, / might become, etc 
bu tocrbeft bu umrbeft 

er toerbe er roiirbe 

tutr toerben totr ttmrbert 

Hjr toerDet if)t toiirbet 

fie toerben fie trmrben 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) fet getoorben, / may id) tocire getoorben, / might 
have become, etc. have become, etc. 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe toerben, I shall id) tterbe getuorbenfein,/^// 
become, etc. have become, etc. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) ttriitbe toerben, / should id) tuiirbe gettorben fein, / 
become, etc. should have become, etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE OF OTHER VERBS WITH fettt* 

176. The present and preterit of verbs conjugated 
with feilt are made as described in § 169. The follow- 
ing synopsis of the subjunctive of fommcn will show how 
the other tenses of such verbs are formed : — 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

id) fomme id) lame 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) fet gefommen id) toare gcfommen 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 8 1 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe fommen tcfj toerbe gefommen fetn 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) toiirbe fommen idj toiirbe gefommen fetn 

USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

177. The subjunctive is often used to give a tone of 
reserve or doubt in sentences where the English em- 
ploys the indicative. See sentence 5 below. But this 
and other idiomatic uses of the subjunctive must be left 
to the advanced grammar. It should be observed, how- 
ever, that the relations of time so definitely expressed 
by the tenses of the indicative are less sharply defined 
in the subjunctive and are not infrequently entirely lost. 

verbs IN iercit, eln, ertt. 

178. Verbs in ieren do not prefix ge in the past parti- 
ciple. Thus : ftubterett, to study ; ftubiert, studied. 
Verbs whose stem ends in el and er may drop the e of 
this termination before the verbal ending e \ elsewhere 
they may drop the e of the verbal ending. Thus : tuCOt- 
bern, ]., to wander ; id) tuanbre, I wander; tt)ir tuanbern, 
we wander. 

IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. 

179. The verb brtngett, to bring, of which the princi- 
pal parts are brtttgen r bradjte, gebrad)t, is a representative 
of a small class of verbs which change their vowel in 
the preterit and past participle, but also add the endings 



82 GERMAN LESSONS. 

of the weak conjugation. Three of these verbs (brtngett 
being one) also modify the vowel in the preterit sub- 
junctive. These words are given in the Appendix, §251, 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ^rattjofe, the Frenchman tnenige,/*^, a few 

bie $ut) (pi., £Ttl)e), the cow 6itten (§ 239), to request, ask 

i>a$ Sfyea'ter, the theatre {for, urn, ace.) 

bct£ ©djciufpiel (pi., *fpiclc) r fpajiercn gefyen, to take a walk 

spectacle, play gem, gladly, willingly (with 

|)err ©djmtbt, Mr. Schmidt verbs often, like to) 

grew Slemm, Mrs. Klemm um (ace), around, about 

grtiuieut SKarie, Miss Mary fiir (acc.),/<?r 

ctUHi<3 (indec), something, \va$ fiir, what sort (kind) of 

anything, some what 
aflc, all 

EXERCISE xx. 

1. |)err ©djmibt fagt, baft er feincr Stouter ben Seamen 
(SUfabetlj gegeben fyibe. 2. 2Btr gingen gcnifpajieren, toemt 
luir nur bie Qtit fatten. 3. grauteht SJJarte fagt, ba$ bie 
granjofen 6cffcrc ©emalbe l)aben ate bte Steutfdjen. 4. §a- 
6en Sic je etiuaS §ubfd)ere3 gefef)en? 5. 9J?an bfirftc ba3 
ntemate fagen. 6. S)er Onlet tft fdjon .burd) t)iele Stinber 
geraanbert. 7. ©tubiere mefyr, bamtt bu betne Slufgabe beffer 
lerneft. 8. 2Sa3 fiir ein @d)aufpiet gaben fie in bem Sweater f 

9. 2)a3 Stinb bat mid) um ein ©tiirf gletfd) ffir fetnen §unb. 

10. Me fagten, baft grau ®lemm bte ©lafer bradjte. 11. 
„D, baft bie ®uf) nidjt geftorben tuare !" fagte ber 2trme. 12. 
SRur toenige Ijabcu ein foldjeS 23ud) ftubicrt. 13. 3Benn ber 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 83 

Rnabt arttg tofire, fo ijatk id) i£)n fe^r gem. 14. 2Bir fatten 
fdfjonere SBtumen ge^a6t, wenn ba§ SSetter tt)armer getucfen 
mare. 15. @r toare gern gefommen, after er mar 5U tniibe. 
16. 3Ba3 ffir @ier fyabt tt)t gefunben ? 

1. The air would be warmer, if the days were longer. 
2. What kind of clothes was Mr. Schmidt wearing when 
you saw him? 3. He studies his lesson, that he may 
learn it. 4. The girls said that the young Frenchman 
had not brought the key of the shop. 5. Miss Eliza- 
beth stood before us and had something in her hand. 

6. The students like* to wander through the valleys. 

7. The king said, " You have only one king, and you 
shall have only one name for God." 8. Our friends 
wrote last May that it had been cold in Paris. 9. They 
were all standing about the cow, which was lying on 
(cutf) the ground. 10. They have been working for a 
long time and ask now for something to eat. 1 1 . Oh, 
that my son were not ill ! 12. If he had a new pair of 
boots, (so) lie would go to school. 13. When we were 
taking a walk, we saw only a few people. 14. If he 
had not fallen into the water, he would not have become 
ill. 15. The American said that he had gone to (in) the 
theatre and had seen the new play. 16. If he has not 
already been studying, he must do so (e3) now. 

* See sentence 2 in the German exercise. 



84 GERMAN LESSONS. 



LESSON XXI 



INSEPARABLE VERBS. 

180. The prefixes be, ent (or etnp), er, ge, t)er, ger are 
never separated in the course of inflection from the verb 
with which they are compounded. They are therefore 
known as inseparable prefixes, and the verbs with 
which they are compounded as inseparable verbs, or, 
more strictly, as verbs inseparably compounded. These 
prefixes never have the accent, and do not permit the 
prefixing of ge in the past participle. Thus : betoofjnen, 
betoofjnte, betooljnt. They have no other effect on the con- 
jugation of the verb. (But in some cases the auxiliary 
is changed, owing to a change in the force of the verb 
when compounded.) These prefixes usually change 
more or less the meaning of the verb with which they 
are compounded. (See § 253.) 

181. Conjugation of the inseparable verb, bettJOfjtten, 
to occupy: — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

betoofjnen betootjnte betoofynt 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT. PRETERIT, 

id) bett>of)ne id) betoofjnte 



INSEPARABLE VERBS. 85 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) fjctbe betootjnt id) fyatte bettofynt 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

idj luerbe beuwfynen tdj tuerbe beft>of)nt Ijaben 

IMPERATIVE. 

bett>of)ne 

INFINITIVES. 

bctoofynen, ju betoofynen betoofynt tjabett, bett>of)nt ju fjabert 

PARTICIPLES. 

betuo^nenb betoofjnt 

Note. — The subjunctive is omitted here and will be omitted 
hereafter, as the student can readily make its forms after the analogy 
of the indicative. 

TRANSLATIONS OF SOME. 

^ 182. The word some preceding a noun is commonly 
omitted in translating into German, but may be rendered 
by ettua3 for the singular and etmgefor the plural. When 
standing alone, it becomes etiuctg in the singular and 
etnige (sometimes toetcfje) in the plural. 

$Hcl, uicnig, all. 
183. 9Stel and tuerttg are usually not declined in the 
singular, but are regularly declined in the plural. 2111, 
when standing before a noun, is fully declined like 
btefer, but before the article, the demonstratives, and 
the possessive adjectives it is often not declined. In the 
plural it is usually not followed by the article. 



GERMAN LESSONS. 
THE INDEFINITE RELATIVE tt><*$. 

184. In this connection may be mentioned the regu- 
lar use of tt)Ct3 instead of ba£ or toetd)e£ after a neuter 
pronoun, personal, demonstrative, or indefinite (e3, bct3, 
aHe3, nid)t3, trie!, etc.) or a neuter adjective used as a 
noun, without a definite antecedent. Thus : aHe3, toa£ 
id) ijabe ; ba§ Scfte, toaS fie lauften. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ?lbenb, the evening fcerlieren (§ 246), to lose 

(ba§~) ^Imerifa, America befycmpten, to assert 

t>tel r much, pi., many gefalten (dat., § 241), to please 

roenig,/^, little erfyalten (§ 241), to receive 

all, all, each gerftoren, to destroy 

gang, whole, entire, all empfcmgen (§ 242), to receive, 

friit), early welcome 

fyeute friit), rtw morning entbeden, to discover 

morgen (geftcrn) friit), to- fcerfaufen, to sell 

morrow {yesterday) morn- begegrten, f. (dat.), to meet 

ing nun, now 

bitte, please ofjne (ace), without 
beginnen (§ 238), to begin 

EXERCISE XXI. 

1. Sftorgen friit) empfangen trjtr unfere ©afte au£ 93erlin. 

2. ©eftern abenb l)at er bie^eitimg unb jtoei SJriefe erfjattcn. 

3. 2)a£ fteine S)orf gefaHt meinem Sftadjbar. 4. ®ie ©m 
tootjner fatten bie @tabt jerftbrt. 5. 3Bir betooljnen mm ein 
gcmjeS |>au$. 6. ®er ©tubent befjauptete, bafe cr alt feine 
Siictjer fcertoren fjabe. 7. Sitte, faufen ©ie mir aurf) ein 



INSEPARABLE VERBS. 87 

menig Suite. 8. Urn tt>ie Did \li)x toerben @te un3 duf (A?) 
ba§ ©tfjlofc ffiljren ? 9. ©ie £icre lagen auf * ber ©rbe unb 
fdjliefen. 10. SBem [tub ©ie geftcnt 6egegnet ? 11. ®3 wax 
tuel SBaffer im Sate. 12. 3>ie 2ttabtf)en beginnen fdjon 
neue ©tiicfe §u lernen. 13. Sonnen @te un3 fagen, toer 
SImerifa entbetft fyat? 14. SBoCt iljr ofjne midj gcfjen? 15. 
3Bie tnete Sifdje unb @tuf)te ljat man fdjon berfauft? 16. ©t 
ftmdjt gent nnr ©eutftf), unb bodj fann er bret ©pracfjcn 
fpredjen. 

1. Will you have some meat or some eggs? 2. Had 
you already begun the letter to (an, ace.) your sister? 

3. Please take this wine and give it to your father. 

4. The young men would not say to whom they had 
sold it. 5. Some early flowers are now blooming in the 
garden. 6. The gentleman heard only the first that she 
said. 7. The teacher asserted that the Romans had 
built the old bridge. 8. At what o'clock did you re- 
ceive the paper? 9. Where did' you receive all your 
friends? 10. Columbus discovered America on Octo- 
ber 12, 1492. 11. He must not take a walk without 
his hat. 12. We met the children of our neighbors in 
the woods. 13. What small heads and feet they have ! 
14. The music pleased the count very [much]. 15. One 
evening {gen,) they found the lost letter in his pocket. 
16. The pupils will begin to work to-morrow morning 
at ten o'clock. 



88 GERMAN LESSONS. 



LESSON XXII. 



SEPARABLE VERBS. 

185. Prepositions and adverbs, when compounded 
with verbs, are separable. The list of such prefixes is 
too long to be given here, but verbs thus separably- 
compounded can readily be recognized by their not 
having one of the inseparable prefixes. The separable 
prefix and the verb are both accented, but the prefix 
has the principal accent. 

186. These prefixes, now written in many situations as 
if they were a part of the verb, were once written as 
separate words. This former usage explains present 
usage. If the prefix is considered a separate word, and 
given the position of an adverb, it must evidently some- 
times precede and sometimes follow the verb. For the 
same reason the prefix ge and the sign of the infinitive 
jju must come between the prefix and the verb. If the 
prefix takes the position of an adverb, it is also 
plain why it follows the present and the preterit tenses 
of the verb in a principal clause and precedes the same 
tenses in a subordinate clause. The prefix is now writ- 
ten as a part of the verb form when it precedes the 
verb. It must be placed after the other adverbial modi- 
fiers and the negative, when it follows the verb. 



SEPARABLE VERBS. 



8 9 



187. Conjugation of the separable verb anfangen, to 
begin (cf. § 235,^) : — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

cmfcmgen fing an angefangen 



PRESENT. 

id) fangc an 



INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

id) fing an 



PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) fjabe angefangen idj Ijatte angefangen 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

idj tnerbe anfangen id) tuerbe angefangen fyaben 

IMPERATIVE. 

fange an 

INFINITIVES. 

anfangen, anjufangen angefangen (ju) (jaben 

PARTICIPLES. 

anfangenb angefangen 

PREFIXES, SEPARABLE OR INSEPARABLE. 

188. 2)urd), fjintcr, fiber, unter, and urn are separable or 
inseparable ; but in verbs separately compounded with 
these words, each element of the compound has its full 
meaning, while the inseparable compounds have an 
altered or figurative sense. Thus: fi'berfe^en (sep.), 
to set across, ferry over ; fiberfe'|en (insep.), to translate. 
It should be observed that one of these prefixes is not 
generally used both separably and inseparably with the 
same verb. 



90 GERMAN LESSONS. 

189. In the present orthography nnber (against) and hrieber 
(again) are sharply distinguished ; the former is inseparable, and 
the latter separable. In the older orthography this distinction in 
spelling was not observed. Sfttg (mis) is regularly inseparable, but 
some of its compounds take ge in the past participle ; t)oH (full) forms 
a few inseparables and a number of separables. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber SKorgen (pi., Stforgen), aufgetjcn, to rise (sun, etc.) 

the morning nntergefjen, to set 

ber ^elb (§ 1 19), the hero itberfe^en (insep.), to translate 

ber griebe (§ 127), the peace anjtetjen (§ 246), to put on 

bte 9J?mute, the minute au^beffern, to mend 

bie ©omte, the sun abfdjretben, to copy 

bte ©djlacl)!, the battle fragen, to ask 

ba3 5Red)t (pi., SRetfjte), the bet (dat.), by, near, at the 
right house of, with 

redjt Ijaben, to be right bet bent ©djnetber, at the 

unrest Ijaben, to be wrong tailor's 

ember, other ob, whether 

berfelbe the same 

EXERCISE XXII. 

1. S)er @d)ttetber beffert ntetnen $Rocf au$. 2. Sim erften 
Scmuar btefe^ 3af)re3 ging bte Sonne urn gtoanjig 9Ktnuten 
nad) fteben anf. 3. §eute tft fie urn neunjetjn 9Kmuten Dor 
fetf)§ untergegangen. 4. @ott gebe un^ ben grteben! 5. 
feat er fd)on feme ©ttefel cmgejogen? 6. 3Ste tuet Uijr tft 
e3? 3d) t)abe feme Ufjr bet nttr. 7. SMtte, Molten ©ic ba3 
@tii<f tn£ SDeutfcf)e itberfetjen. 8. 2Str empfmgen bte $reunbe 
bet £>erm ©d)mtbt. 9. ©djretbe ben SSrief ab unb bringe 



SEPARABLE VERBS. 9 1 

tf)tt tnir. io. S)er eble $db fid in kr -©djtadjt Bet 0/) 
Siitjen. 1 1. ©r fagte, baf$ er meine ©djutjc auS&effere. 12. 
„©a toarb au3 3l6enb unb SKorgen ber britte Stag." 13. 
28 ir lefen biefelben 93iid)er unb iiberfe^en fie in3 (Snglifdje. 
14. @r fragte, ob bie Stnbern an^ unrest fatten. 15. S)er 
©djitler befjcurptete, bafc er bie Slufgabe anfinge. 16. @r 
begann feine Stleiber anjujiefjen. 

1. You are right; it is half past eight. 2. You must 
mend your dress. 3. The sun was setting when the 
great battle began. 4. She has not translated the piece 
which you read yesterday. 5. He asked whether he 
should mend the book. 6. My son began to copy the 
letter at a quarter past three. 7. There were many 
heroes among the Romans. 8. Did you see my new 
coat at the tailor's? 9. They said that the sun had not 
risen. 10. The same flowers grow in our garden. 

11. Have you lost the letter which your sister copied? 

12. My cousin was putting on his boots, when I went 
into the room. 13. Peace be with you ! 14. Has the 
count destroyed the other castle? 15. The aunt loved 
the child, because it was friendly and good. 16. Good 
morning (ace), William. Have you brought me the 
newspaper? 



92 GERMAN LESSONS. 



LESSON XXIII. 



REFLEXIVE VERBS. 

190. Any German transitive verb may have a reflexive 
pronoun as its object; that is, it may have an object 
pronoun corresponding to the subject. Thus: 3d) 
table mid), / censure myself. Verbs are, however, re- 
garded as properly reflexive only when they are always 
used reflexively, or when they have a special meaning 
in this use. 

191. The reflexive pronouns for the first and second 
persons are the same as the personal pronouns, mid), 
mtr, bid), bir, Utt3, eud). For the third person and for 
@ie there is a special reflexive fid), which is used for 
both numbers and all three genders. The reflexive 
pronoun is generally in the accusative, but is sometimes 
in the dative and rarely in the genitive. @id) may be 
either accusative or dative. The conjugation of reflex- 
ive verbs offers no new features. The auxiliary is f)Ctben, 
and the reflexive pronoun takes the position of a pro- 
noun object. 

192. Conjugation of fid) freuen, to rejoice .•— • 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

fid) freuen freute fid) gefreut 



REFLEXIVE VERBS. 



93 



id) frette mid) 
bu freuft bicf) 
er fratt fid), etc. 

PERFECT. 

id) fjabe mid) gefreut 

FUTURE. 

id) luerbe mid) freuen 



INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

idj freute mid) 
bu freuteft bid) 
er freute ftd), etc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id) fjarte mid) gefreut 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe mid) gefreut f)a6en 

IMPERATIVE. 

freue bid) 



INFINITIVES. 

fid) (ju) freueu fid) gefreut (ju) tjaben 

PARTICIPLES. 

ftdj freueub fid) gefreut (only in compound tenses) 

193. Reflexive verbs are very common in German, 
being often used where they would be inadmissible in 
English. This is particularly the case with transitive 
verbs when it is desired to give them the force of an 
English intransitive. Thus : @r toeubet fid), he turns. 
The reflexive is also sometimes used where we should 
expect a passive. Thus : £)er @d)(uffel tjctt fid) gefmtben, 
the key has been fnund. 

Settumfe, memanfe, icbcrmamt. 

194. Semcmb, somebody, some one, and niemcmb, no- 
body, no one, add (e)3 for the genitive; they may form 
the dative in em or en f and the accusative in eu, but are 



94 GERMAN LESSONS. 

usually not inflected in these cases. 3ebertnamt, every- 
body ', has (e)g in the genitive, the other cases being 
like the nominative. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber ^rofeffor (§ 234), the fid) fefcen, to sit down, to take 

professor a seat 

ber ^luft, the river fid) ertnnern (gen., or an with 
bte ©tmtbe, the hour, the ace), to remember, recall 

lesson fid) befinben, to be, do 

bte SBcmb (pi., SBfinbe), toiffen (§251), to know 

the wall fi^en (§ 239), to sit 

bag Qati), the roof notf), yet, still 

bag ©rag, the grass nod) ntd)t, not yet 
fid) legett, to lie down 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

1. 3d) toeifc nidjt, tote er fid) l)eute befinbet. 2. Seber- 
mann freute fid) ba$ @efid)t beg alten ©rafen toieber ju 
feljert. 3. (Srttmerft bu bid) an ben Stamen beg $Profefforg ? 
4. 9Bag filr Stpfelbaume fjaben @te in Sfjrem ©arten? 5. 
SBtr fetjen jemanb auf bent 2)ad)e. 6. Sinige Saufteute 
fejjten ficE) an ben £ifd). 7. 9Sor einer ©tunbe toar S()r 
iperr Drtfel auf bent $luffe. 8. Sf)r legtet end) ing ©rag. 

9. Sg gibt biele fteinen Siere in ben SBdlbern Slmerifag. 

10. S)er grofte §etb ift nod) mdt>t gefommen. 11. fiber* 
morgen fangen fair unfere beutfdjen ©tunben an. 12. 2Btr 
blieben nod) eine ©tunbe unb lafen bie geitmtgen. I 3- 
SJfetn greunb faft bor mir in. ber ®trd)e. 14. SDte ^Srofeffo^ 
ren freuten fid) liber bie fd)onen ©entatbe an ber 9Banb. 15. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 95 

SWemcmb ttmfcte, too er toofjnte. 16. 3d) fantt mid) tridjt 
barart ermnern. 

i. You rejoiced to see the green apple-trees, did you 
not? 2. They were sitting by (an) the table, but he 
was still standing near the wall. 3. How are you to- 
day? 4. Do you know whose house this is? 5. For 
a long time no one could build a bridge over {ace.} 
this river. 6. The gentleman would not take a seat. 

7. In an hour some one will show us where he lives. 

8. We can see the high roofs of the houses. 9. The 
professor could not remember my name. 10 My father 
was very ill day before yesterday. 1 1 . The dog wished 
to lie down in the water. 12. I did not sit down 
on the chair. 13. Everybody laughs when he begins 
to sing. 14. The horses can not eat the short grass. 
15. It would be pleasant, if we could take our French 
lessons of (bet) the same teacher. 16. Did you ask 
whether they had mended the clothes ? 



LESSON XXIV. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



195. Impersonal verbs are always in the third per- 
son singular, sometimes without a subject, but generally 
with the indefinite subject e3. Impersonal verbs may 
refer to the phenomena of nature, or may be other 



96 GERMAN LESSONS. 

verbs used and inflected in a similar manner. Thus : c3 
regnet, it rains ; e3 biirftet mid) or mid) bitrftet, / am 
thirsty ; e3 ftopft, some one is knocking ; e3 ttmnbert mid), 
I wonder ; e^ tut mir letb, I am sorry. The conjuga- 
tion of such verbs offers no new features and is omitted 
here. Impersonal verbs are more often used in German 
than in English. 

REMARKS ABOUT SOME PRONOUNS AND ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

196. (Siner and leiner are the pronoun forms of em 
and letn and are declined like biefer. 2ftcm is used only 
in the nominative, but its missing cases may be supplied 
by those of etner. ©old) may be placed before or after 
em, but is uninflected when placed before. Thus : fold) 
em or em fotd)er. SKdttS) is usually declined as stated in 
§ 58, but before em it is uninflected and sometimes also 
before an adjective. Thus : mcmdj em Warm, mcmd) 
jd)one SBtumen instead of mcmdjer ffllann and mcmdje 
fd)dnen 33tumett. The same statement applies to toetd), 
especially when it is exclamatory. Thus: toeld) em 
Sfftomt, toeld) fd)5ne ©lumen. 

197. The demonstratives are often .used where we 
should have the personal pronouns in English. This 
substitution may be made for euphony, for emphasis, 
or for the sake of greater clearness, the latter usage be- 
ing especially important. Thus : 2)cr (for er) f)at ba§ 
©ute getfjcm, fo tcmge er fomtte ; er fa!) ben 2Wamt imb bef- 
fen @of)tt (that is, the man's son) ; er [jat erne ©djlucftcr : 
!ennen @te biefetbe (for fie)? 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 97 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

198. From the possessive adjective mem is formed the 
possessive pronoun metner, which is declined like btefer. 
For metner may be substituted ber metne, or ber metntge, 
metne and metntge being declined like any other adjec- 
tive. A similar series may be made from betn, fein, ii)X, 
etc. Thus : 

metner, ber metne, or ber metntge 

beiner, ber betne, " ber bemtge 

f enter, ber feme, " ber fetntge 

unfercr, ber un[(e)re, " ber tmf(e)rtge, etc. 

The forms (ber) metne, (ber) metntge can not be used 
without the article. The words are used like English 
mine, ours, yours to take the place of a noun. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber SHjfdjieb, departure, rcgnen, to rain 

leave bonnent, to thunder 

ber 83ote, the messenger bitten, to lighten 

bte grcube, the joy fdjneten, to snow 

ba$ ©elb, the money ^agetn, to hail 

5a3 Seib, hurt, pain, sorrow uerfte^eit, to understand 

Co tut nttr ictt), I am sorry e3 t)erfte()t fid), of course 

fennen (§ 251), to know, be e£ bitrftet mid), I am thirsty 

acquainted with ttttmer, always 

c*3 ftnmbert titid) r / wonder, toafyrenb (gen.), during 

am astonished \)txm,for 

Clopfen. to knock, rap tt)of)l, probably, indeed. 



98 GERMAN LESSONS. 

EXERCISE XXIV. 

i. @3 burftet mid). 2)arf id) urn em ®(a3 SBaffer bitten? 
2. @3 bonnert unb btittf fefjr oft tm ©ommer. 3. @3 reg= 
nete fdjon, aU iutr 9Ibfd)ieb nafjmen. 4. 2Be(d) fdjone 
SRofen f)aft bu in ber £>anb ! 5. @3 berftefjt fid), ba^ @ie ba£ 
©etb bet ftcf) fjaben. 6. @3 ttmnbert mid), baft e§ fjente 
fdjneit. 7. @3 tut mir teib, aber id) lenne ben SBoten md)t. 
8. Giner muftte burdj ben gluft gefjen, benn e3 tvax feine 
SBriicfe bariiber. 9. 2)e£ Sonig3 greube tvax toof){ groft, at£ 
er bm §elben fat). 10. SBafjrenb be3 Staged fdjtfift biefet 
93ogeI, aber er ftrtgt in ber %la3)L 11. @3 flopft. 3Ber 
fomtnt? 12. ©eftern ift er feinem SSetter nnb einem greunbe 
beSfetben begegnet. 13. (£3 toctre nidjt angenefym, toenn es 
fjeute tjagette. 14. 2)er Sefjrer Ia3, tooi ber ©djiiler abge= 
fd^rteben Jjatte. 15. SBir toollen ba3 erfte unb ba^ jiuettc 
©tiid iiberfe|en. 16. 2)ie£ ift mein 23ud) ; SBitfjelm §at ba$ 
Sljrtge. 

1. They could not take a walk, for it was raining. 
2. Gertrude said that she was sorry. .3. Are you 
thirsty? 4. My mother knew her and her daughter. 
5. They rejoiced to find (the) half of the money which 
they had lost. 6. It hails often in warm countries. 
7. At what o'clock did the sun set yesterday? 8. Prob- 
ably you did not understand what the messenger said 
when he took his departure. 9. After (the) joy comes 
(the) sorrow. 10. Do you know who was knocking 
an hour ago? 11. Of course he was very [much] as- 
tonished. 12. It will snow to-morrow, will it not? 
13. Does it always lighten when it thunders? 14. Dur- 



PASSIVE voice. 99 

ing the evening he wore one of my coats, because his 
was at the tailor's. 15. Can you remember (it, bctrcttt) 
where those professors live? 16. What pretty hands 
the girl has ! 



LESSON XXV. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

199. The passive voice is formed in German by com- 
bining the past participle of a transitive verb with the 
auxiliary toerbett, and not with feirt as we should expect 
from the analogy of the English. The only change in 
the • conjugation of toerben when forming the passive 
is the dropping of ge of the participle getoorben in the 
compound tenses. 

200. Conjugation of the passive of lobett : — 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

id) toerbe gelobt, lam id) tourbe c\doht, f was 

praised, etc. praised, etc. 

bit ttnrft gelobt, etc. bu tDurbeft gelobt, etc. 

PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

id) bin gelobt toorben, I have id) wax gelobt toorben, / had 
been praised, etc. been praised, etc. 



IOO GERMAN LESSONS. 

FUTURE. FUTURE PERFECT. 

let) tuerbe getobt toerben, / id) toerbe gelobt toorben fetn, 
shall be praised, etc, I shall have been praised, 

etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

toerbe getobt, be praised. 

INFINITIVES. 

gelobt (ju) toerben, to be gelobt toorben (ju) fetn, to 
praised. have been praised 

PARTICIPLES. 

gelobt toerbenb, being praised gelobt toorben, been praised 

201. The German has only the one form, er toirb ge- 
lobt, for the various English forms he is praised, he is 
being praised, etc. The agent is expressed by t)0tt with 
the dative. Thus : er toirb t>ott feinem SSctter gelobt, he 
is praised by his father. 

202. The passive is much less used in German than 
in English. For it is substituted most frequently the ac- 
tive with man, or not infrequently the reflexive. Thus : 
man bant erne SBriide itber ben gtuft, a bridge is being built 
over the river ; ber ©djliiffet l)at ftdj gefunben, the key has 
been found. An English passive may often best be 
translated into German by using the active with the 
agent as subject. 

203. A difficulty arises in understanding and trans- 
lating the passive owing to the fact that the verb to be 
with a past participle may make a real passive or may 



PASSIVE VOICE.'.' IOI 

merely express a condition, or state. Thus the sen- 
tence, The door was closed at eight o'clock is ambiguous 
when standing alone. It may mean, somebody closed the 
door at eight o'clock, or the door was already closed when 
somebody noticed it at eight o'clock. The former idea, 
being the real passive, must be expressed by toerbett: bte 
Stpr tourbc um adjt Uf)r (jefdjtoffen, the latter by fettt : bte 
%ff&t tvax. . . gefdjtoffen. The difficulty is with the Eng- 
lish, the German being perfectly clear. Often it will be 
at once evident that the agent has been merely omitted ; 
then toerbett will, of course, be used. In other cases the 
difficulty can generally be removed by turning the Eng- 
lish sentence into the active form ; if the tense remains 
the same as before, use toerben ; if not, use fetn. 

SOME USES OF THE PERFECT AND PRESENT. 

204. Sentences have already occurred in which the 
German has used the perfect tense where we should 
expect the preterit. Thus: 3d) fyabt gefterrt betnett 
greuttb gefetjen ; @ott t)at bte SBelt erf djaffen ( God created 
the world). The subject can not be further investigated 
here. It may be noted also that the German uses the 
present, where we have the perfect, to express an action 
or state still continuing. Thus : 2Bir fittb fdjott Ictltge in 
2(metila, we have been in America a long time {already)* 

VOCABULARY. 

ber 28eg, the way, road, path auffetjen, to put on 

bcr $eHner, the waiter ftrielen, to play 

bie (£ijenbaf)tt, the railroad iDiinjdjen, to wish, desire 



I02 GERMAN LESSONS. 

ba§ 9luge (§ 128), the eye ' feit (dat.), since 

(ba§) 9iom, Rome toeg, away 

ba3 Suftfptet, (pi, — faiele), nimmer, 'never 

the comedy gegen (ace), against, towards 
fjeiften, intrans. (§ 245), to be felten, seldom, rarely 

called, be named mat, times 

anttoorten (dat. pers.), to jefynmal, ten times 

answer, reply to 

EXERCISE XXV. 

1. 3)er ®nabe tonrbe Don feinem SSater gelobt. 2. (Sin 
Snftfpiet t)on SBtdjert ift geftern gefptett loorben. 3. 2)a3 
©djloft ift jerftort. 2)a3 @d)toft ttrirb gerftort. 2)a£ @(J)Iob 
ift jerftort toorben. 4. 2)er Miner bracljte mir nodf) eine 
Saffe Saffee. 5. ©etje ben §nt auf unb taufe in ben ©arten. 

6. ®ie jihtgfte £od)ter, bie ©ertrub tjeiftt, Ijat btaue Slugen. 

7. S)er SBrtcf mirfc morgen jtoeimal abgefefyrieben toerben. 

8. 2Bir tooljnen fett jeljn Sa^ren in bemfeI6en |>aufe. 9. 
SSorigen gristing baute man bie nene ©fenbatjn. 10. $)er 
9Kamt fonnte mir ntd)t anttnorten. 1 1. SlHe 2Bege futjren 
xiatf) 9tom. 12. dimmer toirb fie Don ifjrer Sautter gelobt 

13. ©ein SRocf ttrirb fcom ©djneiber au^gebeffert toerben. 

14. ©egen §Ibenb ttmnfdjte er toegjugetjen. 15. SDiefe Sieber 
toerben nnr felten gefungen. 16. 2)iefe£ 83ilb toar nodj nidjt 
t)erfauft toorben. 

S\. Where were these eggs found? 2. Can you tell 
me whether this road leads to the next village? ,3. This 
piece will never be played. 4. He put on his hat and 
went away with me. • 5. Lessing's comedy, " Minna von 
Barnhelm," is often read. 6. His neighbors were all 



MODAL AUXILIARIES. IO3 

very friendly to (gegen) him. t 7. Before the battle all 
[the] railroads had been destroyed. 8. Would you like 
to have a cup of coffee or a glass of wine? ' 9. They 
asked him what (tine) he was called, but he did not an- 
swer them. 10. How long have you been wearing this 
coat (already)? 11. They asked the waiter three 
times for a piece of bread. 112. All his money had al- 
ready been given to the poor. 13. The young count 
has been studying in Berlin for (f eit) two years. 1 4. More 
beautiful eyes than hers are seldom seen. , 15. (The) 
well-behaved children are loved and praised. 16. Would 
you have wished it, if you had known him ? 



LESSON XXVI. 



MODAL AUXILIARIES. 

205. Sittttten, mogen, mitffert, biirfen, toolten, and fallen 
(cf. § 250) are unlike the English modal auxiliaries in 
that they have a complete conjugation (except that the 
imperative is wanting in all but tooHett). But when one 
of these auxiliaries is used in a compound tense with 
an infinitive, it changes the participle to the form of the 
infinitive. Thus: id) fjabe ge£)ert tDoIIett (not getooUt). 
The synopsis of the indicative of formert, for example, 
when it is to be used with an infinitive, is as follows : 
id) fctmt, id) fomtte, id) tjctbe — f fitrnen, td) tjcttte — ffimten, 
etc. (Cf § 235, i.) 



104 GERMAN LESSONS. 

206. As the English modal auxiliaries are defective , 
the force of the German is often best given by substi- 
tuting a phrase. Thus : id) t)abe — miiffen, / have beeti 
obliged, id) toerbe — fonnen, / shall be able, etc. But a 
greater difficulty is apt to arise in translating such 
phrases as could have, should have, might have, etc., 
into German. Occasionally the infinitive in such 
phrases really has the perfect tense, but ordinarily it is 
made perfect simply because the auxiliary is defective. 
For example, / could have sold it, is probably not id) 
fomtte e3 fcerfcmft f)ctben, but idj fjatte e£ fcerfcmfen fonnen. 
That is, / could have sold it generally means, / should 
have been able to sell it. The difficulty can be removed 
by substituting another English phrase of the same 
meaning, as just illustrated. 

207. The many idiomatic uses of the auxiliaries can 
not be noted here, but the following common significa- 
tions should be observed : — 

fonnen, ability, possibility (can, is able, may) 
mogcn, possibility, concession, liking (may, like) 
biirfen, permission, venturing (may, dare) 
miiffen, absolute obligation, compulsion (must, 

obliged to) . 
foUen, moral obligation, report, necessity (shall, is 

to, is said to) 
tooUen, wish, intention, assertion (will, is about to, 

claims) 



MODAL AUXILIARIES. IO5 

VERBS GOVERNING THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT £lt. 

208. Besides the modal auxiliaries the following verbs 
also take an infinitive without gu: f)etJ3en, t)etfen, l)dren, 
laffen, tefjrert, lernen, madjen, and fef)en. Thus: id) Ijorte 
it)tt Iad)en. These verbs, with varying degree of regularity, 
use the infinitive instead of the past participle with an- 
other infinitive (cf. § 205). The infinitive without ju is 
used in a few other phrases, which need not be further 
mentioned here. Thus : er gtng fpajteren. §orert, taffen, 
and fef)en are followed by the active infinitive, which 
may, however, be passive in meaning. Thus : id) f)5re 
if)tt pretfen, / hear him praised. 

Saffctt. 

209. Sctffen (241) is used with the active infinitive 
without JU not only in the sense of let but also in the 
sense of have done, cause to be done, make do, etc. Thus : 
er ltef$ bie ©tiefet madjen, he had the boots made. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber Stegen, the rain eben, even, just 

ber (Sbetftetn, the precious efcett ftoHen, be on the point 

stone of, be just about to 

ber SDtamanf (§ 119), the fdjetnen (§245), shi?te,seem 

diamond toegen (gen.), on account of 

(ber) Sftittag, noon fenben (§ 251), to send 

(bic) 9)£ttternad)t, midnight benlen (§ 251), think 

ba$ Ufa, the shore, bank lje(fen (dat., § 238), help 

ba3 @olb, the gold ftmrum, why 

ba§ @i(6er, the silver h\%, until, till 
Ijetfcen, trans. (§ 245), bid 



106 GERMAN LESSONS. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

i. @3 fdjeint, ba$ man neue @tfen&at)nen bauen 'will. 2. 
©r fragt, 06 er um SKttternadjt geljcn bitrfe. 3. 2)er $auf* 
mann foil tnefe 2)tamanten unb anbere Sbclftetne fyaben. 4. 
2)u mufct ju 9Ktttag am Uf er fte^en. 5 . 2Btr fatten ba$ (Mb 
fenben fomtett, aber ttrir t)aben e3 ntdjt getoollt. 6. 3Ba* 
rum f)aben @ie it)m nidjt fjetfen tooKen ? 7. ©r liefc bie Utjr 
au3 ©tlber ma^en. 8. 2)er 9ftenfd) benft ; fonncn bie Siere 
aucfjbenfen? 9. ©er Sonig Ijicjj Ujn toeggefjcn. 10. §aft 
bu bie SSogel in ber Suft fingen Ijoren? 11. S)ie fitnbci 
miiffen im §aufe bletben, bi3 e3 warmer totrb. 12. SBcgcn 
be3 9iegen£ f)abe id) I)eute ntcljt au3gcf)en fonnen. 13. @r 
moUte eben SIbfdjieb nefjmen. 14. SKagft bu biefeS SSrot? 
15. SBeifet bu, ttmrum er an bie SBanb Ropfte ? 16. 9^ac£) 
ber groften @d)tac£)t fyatte er grieben madjen fallen. 

1. Can you see the banks of the river? 2. If we had 
had silver or gold, we could have helped them. 3. They 
did not wish to send the diamonds [to] him. 4. The 
messenger seems to be ill. 5. Would you like to buy 
five or ten pounds of this coffee? 6. Did the king bid 
you come at noon or at midnight? 7. Had the precious 
stones already been sold? 8. "Why did I have to do 
that?" thought he. 9. My daughter could not take a 
walk until the sun had set. 10. Our new neighbors 
are said to be very rich. II. The count had the whole 
city destroyed. 12. I was on the point of asking the 
professor why he did not answer you. 13. Shall we 
lose our money, because you have lost yours? 14. He 
knows that he did not read the letter. 15. Have you 



ADVERBS. IO7 

never seen the children playing {inf.) in the grass? 16. 
No one could have worked better than he [did]. 



LESSON XXVII. 



ADVERBS. 

210. Almost all German adjectives, in their unin- 
flected form, may be used as adverbs. The adverb is, 
therefore, often to be distinguished from the adjective 
only by the absence of the endings of inflection, or in 
many cases only by the context. There are also other 
words used only as adverbs. 

211. Adverbs, when compared, are compared like 
adjectives, but the simple superlative in ft is seldom ad- 
missible. Ordinarily an adverbial phrase with ait or 
cmf (occasionally in or gu) is used. Thus : am beften, 
attf3 fdfjfinfte. The phrase with am is used when direct 
comparison is intended, the one with auf3 when no com- 
parison is intended. Thus : @r lam am fritfyftert fcon alien, 
he came earliest of all ; aHeS in be3 Saifer3 ©arten toar 
auf3 feinfte au3gebac£)t, everything in the emperor's garden 
was most elegantly planned, 

212. §in expresses motion front, and I)er motion 
towards the speaker or the scene of the narrative. They 
are widely used with verbs and adverbs and must fre- 
quently be left untranslated. See sentences 5, 8, and 
15 in Exercise XXVII, 



108 GERMAN LESSONS. 

213. Analogous to the English use of ever with who, when, etc, 
whoever, whenever, etc., the German uses cmd), rmr, immer {ever) 
after similar words. But, unlike ever, these adverbs are commonly 
separated by one or more words from the words they modify. Thus : 
2Ber er ctudj fei, whoever he may be ; toetm er and) fomme, even if he 
come. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

214. A number of the common prepositions are here 
given : 

GENITIVE. 

tocifjrenb, during iuegen, on account of 

DATIVE. 

ait3, out of, from fctt, since 

bet, by, near, at the house of, with t) OH, from, by, of 

nut, with ju, to, at, for 
natf), towards, to, after 

ACCUSATIVE. 

burtf), through, by of)ite, without 

\x\x,for um, around, about 

gegen, towards, against ftriber, against 

DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE (CF. § 1 10). 

an, at, on itber, over, above 

auf, upon, on, at unter, under, below, among 

t)tnter, behind uor, before, in front of, ago 

in, in, into jtnifdjcn, between 

neben, beside, by 

215. The wide variety of signification and the many 
idiomatic usages of the prepositions cannot be noted 



CONJUNCTIONS. IO9 

here. In addition to the prepositions just mentioned, 
there are a number of other words used prepositionally. 
There are also some compound prepositions, of whicji 
gegeniiber, opposite to, is an example. Generally the 
preposition precedes its noun, but a few may follow the 
noun. Thus: mtr gegenitber, opposite to me, 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

216. Conjunctions may be divided into three classes 
according to their effect upon the arrangement of the 
clause which they introduce. The first two of the fol- 
lowing classes may be called co-ordinating, and the third 
class subordinating conjunctions. 

217. General Connectives. These are unb, ctoer, 
aHein, fonbent, ober, benn. They have no effect on the 
order of words. 

Note. — $ber, aHei'n, and fonbent may all be translated by but. 
3lUeitt is less common than aber ; fonbent differs from both in being 
strongly adversative (introducing an opposite statement), and can 
be used only after a negative. 9Iber like the English however, by 
which it is often best rendered, may stand within the clause. 

218. Adverbial Conjunctions. These are originally 
and strictly adverbs, and when placed first in a clause 
they invert the personal verb. Standing within 
the sentence they do not invert the verb. Some of 
them are ctt)0, accordingly, therefore, better, therefore^ 
bod), benrtod), nevertheless, yet, inbeffen, meanwhile, etc. 

219. Subordinating Conjunctions. These are such 
conjunctions as introduce only dependent or subordi- 



IIO GERMAN LESSONS. 

nate clauses, and therefore transpose the personal verb 
to the end of the clause. Some of them are, afe, toemt, 
tyamt, when, ba, as, since, toeit, because, etc. 

Note. — Of the three words for when, af$ is used for a single 
action or event in past time ; tt)amt in questions, direct or indirect ; 
and tt)emt in all other cases. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber SRauber, the robber anfetjen, to look at 

ber Saifer, the emperor gtauben, to believe, think 

bie Sftadjtigalt, the nightin- ftefjlen (§ 238), to steal 

gale nennen (§ 25 1), to name 

ba$ Sett (§ 128), the bed gerabe, exactly, just 

fdjnell, quick, fast toofytn, whither, where 
fyerrtid}, splendid 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

1. 2)er @raf fat) ben Shtaben freunbtid) an. 2. 2)ie 9?a^» 
tigaH fang jo ijerrlttf), ba% ttrir un£ fetjr frcuten. 3. @ein 
§au3 ift ntdjt groft, fonbern fefyr ttein. 4. SBiffcn @ie, toann 
bie SRuftt anfangt ? 5. 2)a3 Sinb fam ju mir, ber £unb 
aber lief fdjnell t)intoeg. 6. 3)a 9tduber fein @e(b geftofyten 
'flatten, fo fonnte er bie UI)r nicfjt faufen. 7. ©taubft bit, bag 
e£ Ijeute frf)ueien tt)irb ? 8. 33itte, fommen @ie fyiertjer. 9. 
(£S regnete, bafjer mufeten totr ju §anfe bteiben. 10. (£r ift 
rttdjt mfibe, imb bod) get)t er fetjr friit) ju Sktte. 11. ©tneS 
£age§ ertjielt ber Saifer ein ncueS 93ud^ iiber bie 9?aci)tigatt. 
T2. §eute abenb fang ber SSoget am beften. 13. 2ltfo mufcte 
ber 95ote ben Srief bringen. 14. S)ie neue Sirdje ftef)t ber 
atten gerabe gegeniiber. 15. SBotjut foHen ttrir gefyen? 16. 
©er §elb mar inbeffen geftorben. 



ORDER OF WORDS. Ill 

I. Our daughter was named after her aunt. 2. We 
rejoiced when we heard the nightingale singing (inf.) in 
the wood. 3. They lived exactly opposite to us. 4. The 
emperor did not believe what the robber said. 5 . Mean- 
while the woman had quickly made the beds. 6. He 
looked at me from head to (h\§ t ace.) foot. 7. This 
splendid castle was entirely destroyed ten years ago. 
8. Come in (fyerein). 9. Waiter, when was this bread 
baked? 10. The children ran out (cf. § 212) into the 
garden. 11. Let us take a walk, for the sun is shining. 
12. They were not her spoons, but ours. 13. I am ill; 
therefore you must go. 14. My guest did not wish to 
go without me, because he did not know the professor. 

15. Their nephew has been living in Germany for (fett) 
two years, and yet he does not understand German. 

16. Can you not run faster? 



LESSON XXVIII. 



ORDER OF WORDS. 

220. That the varying position of the personal verb 
is the essential difference in the three word-orders (nor- 
mal, inverted, and transposed) has already been noted 
in §§ 102 and 146. It should be further observed that 
principal clauses may have either the normal or inverted 
order, while subordinate clauses regularly have the 
transposed. 



112 GERMAN LESSONS. 

221. A principal clause must have the normal order, 
if its subject begins the sentence. By the subject is 
meant the subject-word with all its modifiers. If the 
sentence begins with anything else than the subject of 
the principal clause (except the conjunctions in § 217), 
the principal clause must be inverted. See sentences 
I, 6, 8 in Exercise XXVIII. 

222. The subordinate clause regularly has the trans- 
' posed order, but if the conjunction bafc is omitted, the 

clause takes the normal, or if the conjunction (com- 
monly toentt) is omitted in conditions, the inverted order. 
See sentences 3 and 8 in Exercise XXVIII. 

223. The regular position of the personal verb is last 
in the subordinate clause; but an auxiliary with two 
infinitives will precede them both instead of following 
them. Thus : er tvti% baft er e3 f)atte tt)im fallen. 

224. The position of the other common elements of 
the sentence has already been given in §§87 and i86> 
and applies to both principal and subordinate clauses. 
The following additional observations should be noted : — > 

1. Of two pronoun objects the accusative usually 
precedes. See sentence 9 in Exercise XXVIII. 

2. For noun objects the order of cases is usually 
dative, accusative, genitive ; but a noun object denoting 
a person usually precedes one denoting a thing. See 
sentence 15. 

3. The order of occurrence of adverbs is usually 



ORDER OF WORDS. H3 

time, place, manner, degree ; but a simple adverb pre- 
cedes an adverbial phrase. See sentence 14. 

4. In the inverted or transposed orders a pronoun 
object regularly precedes a noun subject. See sentence 
1 1. 

225. Many exceptions to the foregoing rules are 
found in German usage, but the rules are important as 
showing the usual construction of the German sentence. 
It should also be noted that the inverted order is much 
commoner in German than in English, and is often used 
to give emphasis to a word or phrase by putting it first 
in the sentence. 

ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE OF TIME. 

226. As has already been illustrated in various sen- 
tences, the accusative is used to express definite and 
the genitive indefinite time, or repeated, habitual ac- 
tions. Thus : (£r fam ben nadjften Sag ; but er fam eine3 
SlbenbS. 

ADVERBIAL GENITIVE. 

227. In this connection may be noticed the adverbial 
use of the genitive. Thus: abenb3, in the evening, mm- 
gen£, in the morning, tette, partly, tecf)t3, to the right, tinfe, 
to the left. 

VOCABULARY. ' 

ber @traf){ (§ 128), the beam, berjentge, that one, he {who) 

ray retf)t, right 

ber Sfyfef jtoetg, the apple-twig tint, left 

ber SRttter, the knight £racf)ttg, splendid 



114 GERMAN LESSONS. 

ber Sfteifenbe, the traveler fdjenfen, present, give 

bie Serdje, the lark beftellen, order (purchases) 

bie £)ornenf)ecfe, the hedge of retfen, f., travel, go 

thorns reidjen, reach, hand, pass 

ba£ ©ebaubc, the building, ring£ um r around about 

edifice gerabe au3, straight ahead 
ba£ Sfteft, /fe nest 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 

i. Stingy urn ba§ ©djlok a6er begann eine Sornenfjede ju 
toad)fen. 2. 2)a£ ©tubium ber neueren ©pradjen max feine 
£)5d)[te greube. 3. ©er 9teifenbe beljaiuptete, er t)abe eben fo 
pracfytige ©ebaube in $ari£ gefefyen. 4. ©ollen tmr recl)t3 
ober linf3 gefyen ? 5. ^ein, geljen ©ie gerabe au§. 6. 85eim 
Slbfdjieb reidjte er mir bie linfe §anb. 7. (S3 toarert tctte 
neue unb tcife olte Sucker. 8. fatten ©tc bie Ufyv fritter 
befteQt, fo fatten ©ie biefeI6e mitbringen ffiimcn. 9. Sitte, 
fdjcnfc e£ mir. 10. S)er ©tubent ruollte eben nadj @ng(anb 
reifcn. 11. S)er SRitter fragte, tote fidj ber $onig befinbe. 

12. ©tcjcnigcn, bie retd) finb, finb nidjt immer eble 9ftenfd)en. 

13. SDie Straiten ber ©onne finb im ©ommer am ttmrmften. 

14. S)ie Sercfye baute ifyr Ifteft ()ter im grueling. 15. ©r gab 
feiner Stouter ben btitfyenben ^IpfefstDetg. 16. SSarum fagten 
©ie unS nitf)t, bafj ©tc e£ fatten t)erfanfenfonnen? 

1. The knight said he would like to see the new 
building. 2. The children work in the morning and 
play in the evening. 3. Please hand me the bread. 
4. Is that your right or your left hand? 5. Can you 
see that beautiful apple-twig through the hedge of 



ORDER OF WORDS. 115 

thorns? 6. Why are the sun's rays not so warm in 
winter as in summer? 7. The lark sings in the air 
but builds its nest on the ground. 8. The book 
I have in my hand is red. 9. The emperor presented 
a black horse to the traveller. 10. You must go into 
the country again to-morrow. II. The merchant has 
not yet sent what you ordered. 12. We praise those 
who are always friendly to (gcgett) others. 13. The 
people said that we should have gone straight ahead. 
14. Did you know the men who were standing round 
about the table? 15. I am astonished that he likes 
such studies. 16. Could the robber remember [from] 
whom he had stolen the splendid diamonds? 



VOCABULARIES. 



EXPLANATIONS. 



The abbreviations employed in these Vocabularies are the usua 1 
ones, such as v for verb, m. for masculine, prep, for prepositio?i, 
etc. In addition to these a dash [ — ] indicates the repetition oi 
the title word. 

.In the German-English Vocabulary the genitive singular of nouns 
is indicated when it differs from the nominative, and the plural is 
indicated whenever the word has one. Thus : 2(pfel, m. — §, * f 
masculine noun, genitive singular 2fyfel§, nominative plural Spfel. 

Irregular verbs and verbs of the strong conjugation are followed 
by the number of the paragraph where they may be found in the 
Appendix. In case the auxiliary is not indicated by f. (fetrt) , the 
verb is to be inflected with Ijaben. Separable compounds are in- 
dicated by hyphens ; inseparables are given as one word. 

Accents are occasionally marked. All numbers refer to para- 
graphs in the Lessons or in the Appendix. Parts of speech and all 
other grammatical details are noted only when necessary to avoid 
confusion. The Vocabularies are restricted to the words given in 
the Lessons, and are intended to necessitate the use of the facts 
given elsewhere in the book. In the German-English Vocabulary 
words printed in full-faced letter are cognates and illustrate more 
fully § 261. 



118 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



5lbenb, m. -«, -e, evening ; abettbS 

(227), in the evening, 
after (217), but, however. 
9lbfd)ieb, m. -«, -e, departure, 

leave. 

ab=ftf}retben (245), copy. 
atf)t f eight. 
adjtsefpt, eighteen. 
atytm, eighty. 
att (183), all, each. 
attent (217), but. 

ai$ (219), when, as; than (159). 
alffl, therefore, accordingly. 
alt, Old, ancient. 
9lmertfa, n. -8, America. 
3(mcrifattcr r m. -3, -, American, 
amerifanifd), adj., American. 
an (no), at, on. 
aitber, other. 
ait=fait(]Ctt (242), begin. 
attgeneljm, pleasant, agreeable. 

an fetyen (239), look at. 

attttUOrtClt {dat.pers.), answer, re- 
ply. 

an=5tc^cn (246), put on {clothing). 
Styfel, m. -8, « apple. 
9fyfelbaum, m. -8, *e, apple-tree. 
Sfyfelsttieig, m. -8, -e, apple-twig. 
5tyrU', w. -8, April. 



arbettett, labor, work. 
arm, poor. 

artig, well-behaved, good. 
aud) f also, too. {Cf. also 213.) 
auf (no), on, upon. {In counting 
time, cf. 161.) 

9Iuf gab e, / -n, lesson. 

auf=gef)eit, f. (242), rise {sun, etc.). 
auf =f C^Cit, put on {hat) . 

9(uge, n. -8, -n (234), eye. 
ftuguft', m. -8, August. 
an$ {dal.), out of, from. 
au3=fceffettt, mend. 



batfett (240), bake. 
balb, soon. 
baueit, build. 
SBaum, ». -e8, % tree. 
beftttbett (237), reft., be, do {of 
health). 

begegttcn, f. (<&/.), meet. 
beguuten (238), begin. 

bC^aU^tCtt, assert. 

bet {dat.), by, near, with, at the 

house of; bet bcm ©dmetber, at 

the tailor's. 
beftetteit, order {purchases). 
*Bett, n. -e8, -en (234), bed. 
betooljttett, occupy. 

119 



120 



VOCABULARY. 



23Ub, n. -e«, -er, picture. 

V\§, till, until. 

bitttn (239), request, ask (um, 

ace, for) ; bttte, please. 
matt, n. -eg, *er, leaf. 
fclau f blue. 

BleibCIt, f» (245) , remain. 
BU^eit, lighten. 
olitl)en, bloom. 
SBlnme, / -n, flower. 
bM, bad. 

?8ott, m. -n, -n, messenger. 
23ticf f m. -eg, -e, letter. 
bringen (251), bring. 
23rnt f «. -eg, -e, bread. 
S3ritrfe f / -n, bridge. 
23mber, m. -g, * brother. 
83ud), «. -eg, *er, book. 



Sljor, n. -eg, *e, choir. 

2> 
ba, «<*'., there ; aw/., as, since. 

(C/.a/so 118.) 
$ad), n. -eg, *er, roof. 
baljer, therefore. 

battttt, conj., in order that, so that. 
*a%, that. 
bcitt (64), thy, thine, your. (Cf. 

57> 65.) 
beiner, ber betne, ber beuttge, 

/™«. (198), thine, yours. 
benfen (251), think. 
bemt (217), for. 

be It nod), nevertheless, yet. 
Der, art., the (54); <&»*., this, 
that, this one, that one, he (125, 



197); rel., who, which, that 
(H9). 
berjettige, that one, he who, he 

(197). 
berfelbe, the same (197). 
bentfd), adj., German; ber 2)eutjd)e 

(145), the German; 2)eutfd), 

German (language). 
$entfd)ionb, n. -g, Germany. 
Seemlier, m. -g, -, December. 
Stamanf, m. -en, -en, diamond. 
btCttCn (dat.), serve. 
Wiener, m, -g, -, servant. 
$ien£tag, m. -4, -e, Tuesday. 
bicfer, (59), this, that; this one, 

the latter, he (197). 
bod) f though, nevertheless, yet, 

certainly, surely, I think, you 

know, etc. 
bonnertt, thunder. 
$omter3tag, m. -g, -e, Thursday. 
$orf, n. -eg, *er, village. 

Sornenljetfe, / ~n, hedge of 

thorns.' 
brei, three, 
bretgtg, thirty, 
brei^eljtt, thirteen, 
britt, third. 
$nttel, n. -4, -, third, third 

part. 
btt (86), thou, you (57). 
bunfef, dark. 
bnrrff {ace), through. (As prefix, 

cf. 188.) 
bitrfen (250), may, be permitted, 

dare. 
biirften, thirst, be thirsty; eg 

bitrftet mid), I am thirsty. 



VOCABULARY. 



121 



cBctt, even, just; eben fo — ttrie, as 

— as; — trottett (250), be on the 

point of, just about to. 
Cbcl f noble. 
©belfieitt, m* -8, -e, precious 

stone. 
(gt, n. -eS, -er, egg. 
cut (62), a, an, one; ber etne 

(140), the one. 
eutanber (indecl.), each other, 

one another. 
einer, /™». (196), one. 
eittige, some. 

eittft f once, formerly. 

(StttttlO^ltCr, m. -8, -, inhabitant. 

@tfCttbal)tt, / -en, railroad. 

elf, eleven. 

(Hifabcti),./: -8, Elizabeth. 

Cttt^fattgCtt (242), receive, wel- 
come. 

(Snglanb, n. -%, England. 

(£ttglfittber, m. -8, -, Englishman. 

englifd), adj., English; (Sngtifd), 
English (language). 

CntbC(fCtt f discover. 

Cr (93), he. (But cf. also 94.) 

(£rbe, / -n, earth, ground. 

ertyaften (241), receive. 

erimtertt, refl. (gen., or an, ace), 
remember, recollect, recall. 

erft, first. 

t& (93)i it. (But cf. also 94.) 
Si ift, there is. 

effett (239), eat. 

tttoa§ (indecl.), something, any- 
thing, some. 



eucr (64), your. 

eu(e)rer, ber eu(e)re, bcr eu(e)rtge, 
pron. (198), yours. 

fatten,f. (241), fall. 
fangen (242), catch. 
gebruar', m. -8, -e, February, 
geber, / -it, feather, pen. 
gelb, n. -e8, -er, field, 
fmben (237), find, 
ftlafrfjc, / -n, bottle. 
Sfletfd), n. -t§, flesh, meat. 
ftet^tg, industrious. 

Piemen, f. (246) , flow. 

%U\, n. -e8, t, raft. 
gflttft, w. -e8, *-t, river. 

folgen, f. (^/.)» follow, 
fragen, ask. 

%xa\\%$\t t m. -n, -n, Frenchman, 
fran^ijfifd), adj., French. 
$xan t f -en, woman, wife, Mrs. 
$raufeUt, n. -4, -, young lady, 

miss, Miss. 
$reitag, m. -8, -e, Friday. 

frcffCtt (239), eat (of animals). 

greube, / -n, joy. 

freuen, refl., rejoice (iiber, ace, at). 

greunb, m. -e8, -e, friend. 

§reunbut, / -nen, (lady) friend. 

fremtblid), friendly. 

$nebe, m. -n8, -n (233), .peace. 

fritt), early; geftent — , yester- 
day morning. 
gnUjlhtg, m. -8, -e, spring. 

fiiljren, lead. 
fiinf, five, 
futtfeefjtt, fifteen. 



122 



VOCABULARY. 



fimfetg, fifty, 
fiir (ace), for; mag — , 
(kind) of, what. 

gufc, m. -ge«, *|e, foot. 



what sort 



©abel, / -n, fork. 

gatt$, whole, entire, all. 

©arten, m. -g, *, garden. 

©aft, w. -eg, *t, guest. 

©ebdttbe, ». -8, -, building, edi- 
fice. 

gcBcn (239), give; eg gi&t, there 
is (152). 

gef alien (241, dat.), please. 

gcgen (ace), towards, against. 

gcgcititbcr (dat., 215), opposite to. 

ge^en, f. (242), go. 

$elb, n. -eg, -er, money. 

©Ctttalbe, «. -8, -, painting. 

gcrabC f exactly, just; — aug, 
sfraight ahead. 

gent, willingly, gladly; — fjabeit, 
like; (with verbs often) like to. 

®ertrub, / -«, Gertrude. 

©efidjt, «. -8, -er (231), face. 

geftent, yesterday; — friif), yes- 
terday morning. 

Gbla$, n. -eg, *er, glass. 

fllauuen (dat. pers.), believe, 
think. 

gluten, glow. 

©olb, n. -eg, gold. 

®0tr, m. -eg, *er (231), god, God. 

Qkaf, m. -en, -en (119), count. 

(#ra3, «. -eg, *er, grass. 

grau, gray. 



grog (156), great, large, tall. 

grim, green. 

gut (156), adj., good ; adv., well. 

Ijaben (251), have; gent — , like 

ijageht, hail. 

Ijalo, adj., half. 

$aiftc,/-n, half. 

jammer, m. -g, f, hammer. 

£anb, / *e, hand. 

$aufe, m. -ng, -n (233), heap. 

§an§ f n. -eg, *er, house; nadj 

— e, home; git — e, at home. 
Ijetgeit (24.$), trans., bid; intrans., 

be called, be named. 
fyeftig, vehement. 

§efb, w. -en, -en (119), hero. 
Ijelfen (dat., 238), help, 
fyer, cf. 212. 

^Ctbft, m. -eg, -e, autumn. 

§err, m, -n, -en (121), master, 
lord, gentleman, sir, Mr. 

Ijerrluf), splendid. 

$er-$, n. -eng, -en (233), heart 

Ijeute, to-day; — frill), this morn- 
ing. 

l)ter, here. 

Inn, cf. 212. 

Ijtnter (no), behind. (As prefix, 
cf. 188.) 

fjorf) (156), high. 

Ijorett, hear. 

fyubfd), pretty. 

£unb, m. -eg, -e, dog. 

fyunbert, hundred. 

§ut, m. -eg,*e, hat. 



VOCABULARY. 



123 



3 
itf) (83), I. 

i(jf, pron., ye, you (57, 86); poss. 
adj., her, their (64) ; 3fyr, your 

(65). 
iljrer, ber ifyre, ber tfyrige, />w*. 

(198), hers, their; 3t)rer, *&v, 

your (65). 
itttmcr, always, ever. (Cf. also 213.) 
in (no), in, into. 
ittbcffeit, meanwhile. 
3rrtltttt f m. -g, *er, error. 

ia, yes. 

Safjr, n. -eg, -e, year. 

3amtar', m. -g, -e, January. 

jc f ever. 

jcbct (60), each, every. 

jebermatttt (I94)» everybody. 

female, ever. 

jemattb (194), somebody, some 
one. 

jener (60), that, that one, the for- 
mer. 

je^t f now. 

Suit, m. -g, July. 

jung, young. 

Sunt, w. -8, June. 



e, 0*. -3, coffee. 
$atfer f tri. -g, -, emperor. 
faft, cold. 

$afe, 0*. -8, - (98), cheese. 
faufeit, buy. 
®aufmamt, m. -4, Hx or 4eute 

(129), merchant. 



feitt (63), no, not a, not any. 

f Ciltcr, pron. (196), no, none, not 
any. 

$euner f m. -g, -, waiter. 

fCtttteit (251), know, be acquainted 
with. 

$ittb, ». -eg, -er, child. 

$irtf)e, / -n, church. 

$irfd)e, / -n, cherry. 

flax (comp., ffarer), clear. 

$letb, n. -eg, -CX, dress; pi. also, 
clothes, clothing. 

Heitt, little, small. 

f forfeit, knock; eg flopft, some one 
is knocking. 

Softer, «. -8, *, cloister, con- 
vent. 

$fttabe, m. -n, -n, boy. 

fommen, J. (238), come. 

&imtg, m. -g, -e, king. 

^imigtit, / -nen, queen. 

fiittttCtt (250), can, be able. 

®0pf, m. -eg, H, head. 

franf, sick, ill. 
®ud)ett, m. -g, - cake. 
£ul), / *e, cow. 
fur5 r short. 



tatfjett, laugh. 
Saben, m. -g, *, shop. 

fiattb, n. -eg, -*er, land, country; 
Ctuf bem (bag) — , in (into) the 
country. 

fang, long. 

latttje, adv., long, for a long time. 
laffett (241), let, have, cause (209). 
£anb, n. -eg, -e, foliage. 



124 



VOCABULARY. 



fottfeit, I (243), run. 

fcbcit, live, be alive. 

(CgCtt, trans , lay; reft., lie down. 

(Cljrett, teach. 

Scoter, m. -g, -, teacher. 

Setb, n. -eg, hurt, pain, sorrow; eg 

tut mir leib, I am sorry. 
gerdje, / -n, lark, 
lewett, learn. 
IcfCtt (239), read. 
2cutt, pi, people. 
liebcn, love, 
fiteb, n. -eg, -er, song. 
licgcit (239), lie. 
ItttJ, left; — g (227), to the left. 
fob en, praise. 
Stiff el, m. -g, -, spoon. 
SottbOtt, n. -g, London. 
Sorbeer, m. -g, -en (234), laurel. 
8*ft,/*e, air. 
Sltfttytel, n. -g, -e, comedy. 

tna^ctt, make. 

9Jlabrf|Ctt, n. -g, -, girl, maiden. 

2ttat, m. -g, May. 

tltat, times; getnt — , ten times. 

matt (196), one, they, you. 

tttOttdjer (60, 196), many, many a. 

aflatttt, m. -eg, *er (231), man, 

husband. 
Uftarie, / -cn«, Mary, 
aftar^, w. -e«, -e, March. 
2Jta£, w. -eng, Max. 
mcljr (156), more. 
tncitt (64), my, mine, 
ttteuter, ber metne, ber meinige, 

pron. (198), mine. 



mcift (156), most. 
2ftettfdj, m. -en, -en (119), man, 
human being. 

9tteffer, n. -4, -, knife. 
afltflum (14c),/ -en, million, 
fitter al f , n. -g, -ien (130), min- 
eral. 
Wxmxttf f. -n, minute. 
ttttt (dat.), with. 

ntit-bringen (251), bring with, 

bring along. 
Stttttag, m. -g, -e ; noon. 
3Jlitterttad)t f / *e, midnight. 
Wlitttood), m. -g, -e, Wednesday. 
tttflgen (250), may, like {cf. Lesson 

XXVI); id) modjtt gem, I should 

like to. 
Wonatf m. -g, -e, month. 
9ttimtag, m. -g, -e, Monday. 
Sftorgen, m. -g, -, morning; mor* 

geng (227), in the morning. 
morgen, adv., to-morrow; — friil}, 

to-morrow morning. 
SJtttoe, / -n, sea-gull. 
Ittiibc, tired. 
SKufiF, /, music. 
miiffen (250), must, have to. (Cf< 

Lesson XXVI.) 
Gutter, /* mother. 
Wl\)Xtt, f. -n, myrtle. 

ft 

ttarfj (ak/.)> to, towards, after; past 
{time). 

ftadjbar, w. -g, -n (234), neigh- 
bor. 

ftad)t,/*e, night. 

ftadjtigaH, / -en, nightingale. 



VOCABULARY. 



125 



Ml) C^ 6 ), nigh, near. 

■ftame, m. -n8, -n (233), name. 

ItcbCtt (no), beside, by. 

•Weffe, m. -n, -n, nephew. 

uefymcn (238), take 

neiit, adv., no. 

nemtctt (251), name. 

Weft, n. -e8, -er, nest. 

tteit, new, modern. 

newt, nine. 

tteutt5eljtt f nineteen. 

iteming, ninety. 

ntd)t, not ; nod) — , not yet. 

IUd)t3 (indecl.), nothing. 

me, never. 

nitmaU, never. 

nietnanb (194), nobody, no one. 

ttimmer r never. 

UOtf), adv., still, yet; — tttd)t, not 

yet. 
%lov ember, m. -8, - ; November, 
nun, now. 

WW, only. (Cf. also 213.) 

D 

Db, whether. 

Dftober, m. -8, - October. 

uber, or. 

Dfctt, «. -8, *, stove. 
oft, Often. 

Ol)tte (ace), without. 
Dttfel, m. -8, -, uncle. 



*J$aar, n. -e8, -e, pair, 
papier' y «. -8, -e, paper. 
*gari3, »., Paris. 
$fcrb, w. -e^, -e, horse. 



p$an$trt, plant. 
$funb, w. -e8, -e, pound. 
£rad)tttj, splendid. 

SProfeffor, m. -8, -en (234), pro- 
fessor. 

91 

dauber, w. -8, -, robber. 

Ofcbe, / -11, vine. 

retf)r, adj., right; —8 (227), to 

the right, 
^edjt, n. -e8, -e, right; redjt 

fyaben, be right. 
Dlegeit, *. -8, rain, 
regnen, rain, 
retd), rich. 

retdjen, reach, hand, pass. 
JHeife, / -Xi, journey. 

reifett, f., travel, go; ber Sftetfenbe 

(145), traveler. 
fRfytin, m. -8, Rhine. 
rtltg3 ttttt (ace), round about. 
ORttter, m. -8, - knight. 
Ofarf, m. -e8, *e, coat. 
9fom, w. -8, Rome. 
JRiimer, m. -8, -, Roman, 
dofe, / -tt, rose. 
tot, red. 

<B 
fagett, say, tell. 

fattft (coi?ip., fanfter), soft, gentle. 
<3djauftnei, n. -8, -e, spectacle, 

play. 
foremen (245), shine, seem. 

ftfjettfett, give, present. 
Sd)(ad)t, / -en, battle. 
fdjlafen (241), sleep. 
Witty, bad. 



126 



VOCABULARY. 



Sd)(o$, n. -eg, *er, castle. 
<3rf)luffel, m. -g, -, key. 

Sdjneiber, m. -g, -, tailor. 
fdjneten, snow. 

frfjttell, quick, fast. 

fdjott, already. 

fdjiht, beautiful, fine. 

fdjmbett (245), write. 

8cf)ul), m. -eg, -e, shoe. 

(Sdjule, / -tt, school. 

©djitfer, m. -g, -, pupil, scholar. 

©djfoager, «. -8, * brother-in-law. 

fdjttmr^, black. 

bte Sdjmet^, Switzerland. 

(gdjmert, n. -eg, -er, sword. 

<5d)ttJefter, / -n, sister. 

fed)3, six. 

@>edj£tel, ». -8, - sixth. 

fetfiaefjtt, sixteen. 

fed)aig, sixty. 

feJjett (239), see. 

f ttytf very, very much. 

fetlt, be (248) ; eg ift, there is, eg 
fhtb, there are (152). 

fettt (64), his, its (94). 

fetncr, ber fetne, ber feinige, pron, 
(198), his, its. 

fcit (dat), since. 

feltett, seldom, rarely. 

fcnbcn (251), send. 

September, m. -g, -, September. 

fei?Ctt, trans., set; refl. y sit down, 
take a seat. 

fldj (191), refl. y himself, herself, it- 
self, themselves, yourself. 

ftc (93)1 she, they; ©ie, you (57). 

ftebcu, seven. 

ftebsctjit, seventeen. 



fteb^tg, seventy. 

<5Uber, n. ~% t silver. 

fingen (237), sing. 

ft^en (239), sit. 

fo, so, thus; fo — rate, as (so) — - 

as. 
(Boljtt, m. -eg, % son. 
fuller (60), such. 
fottett (250), shall, ought, be said. 

(Cf. Lesson XXVI.) 
©ommer, m. -g, -, summer, 
fonbern (217), but. 
©onnabcttb, m. -g, -e, Saturday. 
(Sonne, / -n, sun. 
Somttag, m. -«, -e, Sunday. 
f^05icren geljen, f. (242), take a 

walk. 

ftuelen, play. 

(&pra{$)t f f. -n, language; neuere 

— XI, modern languages. 
fpredjen (238), speak. 
&tabt, f. *e, city. 
ftarf, strong. 
fteljett (240), stand, 
ftetylen (238), steal. 
fterben, f. (238), die. 
Stiefel, m* -g, -, boot. 
©traljl, m. -eg, -en (234), beam, 

ray. 
6trage, / -n, street, 
(gtittf, n. -eg, -e, piece. 
©tubent', w. -en, -en, student, 
ftubteren (178), study. 
Stubium, «.-g,-ien (130), study 
<5tttl)f, m. -eg, *e, chair. 
(Stultbe, / -n, hour, lesson, 
fnrfjen, seek, search. 
ffijf, sweet. 



VOCABULARY. 



127 



frtbcftt, blame, censure. 
£ag, m. -e8, -e, day. 
£lrf, n. -e$ f ^er, valley. 
%antt,fi -n, aunt. 
%ajtf)t,f. -II, pocket. 
2affe,/ -n, cup. 
taufent), thousand. 
Setter, m. -§, -, plate. 
Xfyta'ttx, n. -g f -,- theatre. 
Xtil,m. -*$,-$ part; tetfS (227), 

partly. 
tetleit, share. 
%\tX, n. -eg, -e, animal. 
%\Xiit,f. -n, ink. 
%i\§, m. -eg, -e, table. 
£od)ter,/ 2, daughter, 
tragett (240), carry, wear. 
ttinfen (237), drink, 
tun (248), do. 

U 

itfcer (no), over, above. (As pre- 
fix, cf 188.) 
itbermorgeit, day after to-morrow. 

U&erfe^Ctt, sep., set across, ferry 

Over; insep., translate. 
Ufer f n. -$, -, bank, shore. 
Uljr, / -en, clock, watch; nrietriet 

— ift e$, what o'clock is it; um 

neun — , at nine o'clock. 
Um (ace), around, about; at 

(o'clock). (As prefix, cf. 188.) 
Mtb, and. 
Unredjt, n. -g, wrong; unredjt 

f)dben, be wrong. 

uttfer (64), our. 



mtf(e)rer, ber tmf(e)re, ber un= 
\(t)x\§t,pron. (198), ours. 

Uttter (no), under, below, among. 
(As prefix, cf. 188.) 

ttitter=gel)en, f. (242), set (sun, 

etc.). 

ttntertan, m. -$, -en (234), sub- 
ject. 

$ater, m. -g, * father. 
S3ei(c^cit f n. -g, -, violet, 
toerfaufen, sell. 
crUerett (246), lose, 
tierjtcljett (240), understand; eg 

oerfieljt fldr), of course. 
better, m. -g, -n (234), cousin. 

Diet (183), much; //., many. 
trietfetdjt', perhaps. 

trier, four. 

$tcrtel, n. -g, -, fourth, quarter. 

triers el) tt f fourteen. 

trier^tg, forty. 

$ogef, m. -g, * bird. 

DOtt (dal.), from, of, by. 

tior (no), before, in front of, ago; 

to, till (lime of day). 
toorgeftent, day before yesterday. 
Inmg, former, last. 

ttmrfjfctt, f. (240), grow. 
SSagett, m. -g, -, wagon, carriage. 
nmljr, true; ni(f)t — , is it not true. 
ttwfyrettb (gen.), during. 

28atb, m- -eg, -"er (231 ) r woods, 

forest. 

233attb, / *e, wall. 



128 



VOCABULARY. 



toattbern, f., wander, 
tomtit (219), when, 
niarm, waim. 
nwrum, why. 

toa§ (116), inter, or rel., what, 
whatever, that which (118, 
184); — filr, what sort (kind) 
of, what. 

Staffer, n. -8, -, water. 

233eg, m * ~ e ^ _e / wa Y> P atn - 

tticg, away. 

ttJCjJCU («£*»•)> on account of. 

tt)Cl)Cn, blow. 

ti}Ct(, because. 

SBein, #*. -e§, -e, wine. 

toeinen, weep. 

fcieift, white. 

nicld)Cr (60), inter., which, what; 
rel. (149), who, which, that. 

tUCtttg (183), little, few, a few; eitt 
— , a little. 

ttJCtttt, if, when (219). 

tticr (116), inter., who; rel. (150), 
(he) who, whoever. 

tterbett, f. (248), become, grow. 

SSetter, n. -g, -, weather. 

ttltbcr {ace), against. 

tt>te, how. 

ttlteber, again. [month. 

UHetuelftC, ber — , what day of the 

2SUljelttt, m. -«, William. 

Winter, m. -8, - winter. 

ttiir (83), we. 

miff en (251), know. 



too, where. (QC a/w 118.) 

SBodje, / -n, week. 

uiuljtit, whither, where. 

Wo\)i, well; probably, indeed, 1 

presume, etc. 
ftoIjttClt, dwell, live. 
ttiottcn (250), will, wish, purpose 

(cf. Lesson XXVI) ; eben — , be 

on the point of, just about to. 
ttmnbent, wonder; e« raunberl 

mid), I wonder, I am astonished. 
tttiittfdjett, wish, desire. 



$C%tt, ten. 
gefynmal, ten times. 
$eigen, show. 
$tit f f. -en, time. 
gdtUttrj, / -en, newspaper. 
Serfttiren, destroy. 
5tcf|Ctt (246), trans., draw; m» 
trans. f., go, move. 

3tmmer, n. -$, - room. 

5U r /r^. (</<z/.), to; adv., too; 

(wzV/fc verb), to.. 

3urf er f w. -8, -, sugar. 
5ttfammc« f together. 
Stuansig, twenty. 
5ttict, two. 
5ttJCit r second. " 
3ttiifcf)ett (no), between. 
Stoittf, twelve. 

3ttJi)lftcl f n. -8, -, twelfth, 
twelfth part. 



VOCABULARY. 



129 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 



a, an, eitt (62). 
able, be — , fonnen (250), 
about, lint {ace.) ; be (just) — to, 
cBeit lt)0llett (250) ; around — , 

rings umfyer. 
above, iiber (110). 
account, on — of, toeaen (gen.). 
accordingly, ctlfo. 
acquainted, be — with, fennen 

(251). 
after, natf) {dat.). 
again, ttrieber. 

against, gegen {ace), miber {ace). 
ago, oor {dat.} ; two days — , bor 

gtt»ei £agen. 
agreeable, angeneljm. 
air,fttft,/(//.*e). 
alive, be — , leben. 
all, all (183); {whole), ganj. 
already, fdjon. 
also, ctudj. 
always, intmer. 
America, toterifa, n. 
American, adj., amerifantfd); n. f 

Sltnerifaner, m. {pi. — ). 
among, unter (110). 
ancient, alt. 
and, unb. 



animal, £ier, n. {pi. — c). 
answer, antttorten {dat.pers.). 
anything, ettt)a§ (indecl.). 
apple, SItofel, m. 
apple-tree, Styfetbaum, m. 
apple-twig, 2tpfe($tt)eig, m. 
April, %$xiV f m. 
around, um {ace.) ; — about, rtng£ 

umljer. 
as, conj., ha; as — as, fo — U)ie, 

ebenfo — ttrie. 
ask, fragen; {request) bitten (239) 

{for, nm r ace). 
assert, befyaupten. 
astonished, be — , ftd) ttmnbem; I 

am — , e$ ttmnbert mid), 
at, an (110), bei {dat.); {o'clock) 

nnt {ace.) ; — the tailor's, htl bent 

©d)neiber. 
August, teguft', m. 
aunt, £ante,/ 
autumn, §erbft, m. 
away, meg. 

B 

bad, fdjtedjt 

bake, batfen (240). 
bank, lifer, n. (J>1. — )♦ 



130 



VOCABULARY. 



battle, ©djfodjt,/ 

be, fein (248); {of health) ftd) be= 

finben (237); there is, are, e$ tft, 

fbtb; e$ gtbt (152). 
beam, ©trctljf, w. (234). 
beautiful, fdjon. 
because, roett. 
become, toerben, f. (248). 
bed, Sett, «. (234). 
before, Dor (110). 
begin, begmnen (238), cm=fangen 

(242). 
behind, Winter (110). 
believe, glauben {dat.pers.). 
below, unter (110). 
beside, neben (110). 
between, jtt)ifd)en (110). 
bid, Jjeigen (245, 208). 
bird, $oget, m. 
black, fdjttmrg. 
Maine, tabetn. 
bloom, bliifyen. 
blue, blau. 
book, SBudj, n. 
boot, ©tiefel, m. 
bottle, gfofdje,/ 
boy, $nabe, #z. 
bread, 23rot, «. (//. — c). 
bridge, SBriide,/ 
bring, bringen (251). 
brother, SBruber, m. 
brother-in-law, ©cfyttmger, m. 
build, fatten. 

building, ©ebaube, n. (97). 
but, (217), aber, fonbern, afletn. 
buy, faufen. 
by, {place) bei {dot.), neben (110); 

{agent) Don («&/.). 



cake, $udjen, ». (//. — ). 

called, be — , fyetgen (245). 

can, fomten (250). 

carriage, SBagen, m. {pi. — ). 

carry, trctgen (240). 

castle, ©d)foJ3, n. (gen. — ffe8)« 

catch, fangen (242). 

censure, tabetn. 

certainly, bodj. 

chair, ©tul)t, m. 

cheese, $cife, m. (98). 

cherry, $trfd)e,/ 

child, $inb, n. 

choir, (Efyor, n. {pi. H), 

church, $ird)e,/ 

city, ©tabt,/ (//. *e). 

clear, liar (comp., flarer). 

clock, Unr, / ; what o'clock is h\ 

nrie »iel U^r ift e§; at seven 

o'clock, um fteben Ul)r. 
cloister, Softer, n. (97). 
clothes, clothing, $feiber, n. pL 
coat, Sftocf, m. 
coffee, $affee, #*. 
cold, fait. 

come, fommen, f. (238). 
comedy, guftftriet, n. {pi. — e). 
convent, $lo.fter, n. (97). 
copy, absfefyreiben (245). 
count, ©raf, m. (119). 
country, 2anb, n.; in (into) the — 

auf bem (ba$) 2anb. 
course, of — , e8 tterfte^t jtdj. 
cousin, better, m. (234). 
cow, &$,/ (//.*e). 
cup, Saffe,/ 



VOCABULARY. 



131 



dare, biirfen (253). 

daughter, Softer,/ (97). 

day, £ag, m. (pi. — e); what — 

of the month, ber ttriet>ielfte. 
December, 2)egember, m. 
departure, 5lbfd)ieb, m. (pi. — c). 
desire, ttmnfdjen. 
destroy, gerftoren. 
diamond, SHamant', m. (119). 
die, fterben, f. (238) . 
discover, entbecfett. 
do, tun (248); {of health) fid) be= 

ftnben (237). (As auxiliary, cf 

74.) 
dog, §unb, w. (//. — e). 
dress, $leib, «. 
drink, trinfen f 237). 
during, maljrenb {gen.). 
dwell, toofynen. 

E 
each, jeber (60), att (183). 
early, frill). 
earth, (grbe, £ 
eat, effen (239); (of animals) 

frcffen (239). 
edifice, ©ebciube, «. (97). 
egg, (St, «. 
eight, ad)t. 
eighteen, adjtgeljn. 
eighty, adjtjtg. 
eleven, elf. 

Elizabeth, (Sttfabetl),/. 
emperor, $aifer, «r. 
England, Gntglanb, ». 
English, engttfdj; (language) (Sng* 

lifd); the — , bie (Snglanber. 



Englishman, (Snglauber, m. 

entire, gang. 

error, 3rrtum, m. (231). 

even, eben. 

evening, 2lbenb, m. (ft. — e); in 

the — , abenbs (227); this — 

Ijeute abenb. 
ever, je, jemalS; (always) immer. 

{Cf also 213.) 
every, jeber (60), all (113). 
everybody, jebermann (194). 
exactly, gerabe. 
eye, Singe, n. (234). 



face, @eftd)t, n. (231). 

fall, fallen, f. (241). 

fast, fdjnell. 

father, 35a ter, m. 

feather, ^eber,/ 

February, gebruar', m. (pi. — e) 

ferry over, nber=fe^en. 

few, tnentg (183); a — , tuenig. 

field, gelb, n. 

fifteen, fiinfgeljn. 

fifty, fiinfgig. 

find, pnben (237). 

first, erft. 

five, fiinf. 

flow, fliefjen, f. (246). 

flower, SBtume,/ 

follow, folgen, f. (dot.)* 

foot, gng, m. 

for, prep., filr (ace.) ; con/., benn 

(217). 
forest, ©alb, m. (231). 
fork, ©abet,/ 
former, oorig. 



132 



VOCABULARY 



formerly, etnft. 
forty, toieqig. 
four, trier, 
fourteen, totergeljtt. 

fourth, {quarter) $tertet, n. 
French, frangoftfd^; the — , bie 

gran^ofen. 
Frenchman, grange, m. 
Friday, greitag, m. {pi. — e). 
friend, greunb, m.; greunbht,/ 
friendly, freunbiidj. 
from, toon {dat.), cms {dat.). 
front, in — of, toor (110). 



garden, (Garten, m. 
gentle, fanft {comp., fanfter). 
gentleman, £>err, m. (121). 
German, adj., beutfct); n., ber 

£)eutfdje (145) ; {language) 

©eutfd). ■ 
Germany, 2)eutfd)fanb, ». 
Gertrude, ©ertrub,/ 
girl, 9flabtf)en, n. 
give, geben (239), fdjenfen. 
gladly, gent. 
glass, ©la«, «. 
go, gefjen, f. (242), reifen, f. 
god, God, ©ott, m. (231). 
gold, ©olb, «. 
good, gut (156); artig. 
grass, ©rct8, n. 
gray, grau. 
great, grog (156). 
green, griin. 
ground, (Srbe,/ 
grow, tDCtd)fen, f. (240); {become) 

toerben, f. (248). 



guest, ©aft, m. 



hail, Ijctgem. 

half, *<#., Ijctlb ; «., §alfte,/ 

hammer, §antmer, m. 

hand, w., §cmb,// v., reifen. 

hat, £mt, #z. 

have, Ijctben (251); — to, miiffen 

(250); {with inf. or part.) , faff en 

(241, 209). 
he, er (93); ber, biefer, berfetbe 

(197); — who, ttoer (149); berje* 

nige (ber). 
head, $opf, m. 
heap, §aufe, m. (233). 
hear, Ijorett. 
heart, §erg, n. (233). 
hedge of thorns, 2)ornenI)ecfe, /. 
help, Ijelfen, f. (238, dat.). 
her, i^r (64). 
here, tjier. 

hero, §elb, m. (119). 
hers, iljrer, ber tljre, ber ir)rtge 

(198). 
herself, refl., ftd) (191). 
high, Ijod) (156). 
himself, refl., fid) (191). 
his, adj. fein (64) ; pron., feiner, 

ber feine, b.er feintge (198). 
home, adv., nad) §aufe; at — , ju 

§ctufe. 
horse, *Pferb, n. {pi. — e). 
hour, ©tunbe,/ 
house, §au$, n. ; at the — of, bet 

{dat.). 
how, ttrie. 
however, aber (217). 



VOCABULARY. 



133 



\undred, Ijunbert. 

hurt, £eib, n. 

iiusband, Wlann, m. (231). 



t, id) (83). 

if, tuemt. 

ill, Iranf. 

in, in (110). 

indeed, toofyL 

industrious, fleigig. 

inhabitant, Gsmtoofyner, m. {pi. —). 

ink, £inte,/ 

into, in (110). 

it, e« (93); bagfelbe (197). 

its, adj., feitt (64); /r^«., feiner, 

ber feme, ber feinige (198). 
itself, rejl., fid) (191). 



January, 3amtar', #z. (//. — e). 
journey, $eife,/ 
joy, greube,/ 
July, 3iHl, m. ' 
June, 3uni, ». 

just, ebfK, gerabe; — about to, 
eben toollen (250). 



key, ©d)tiiffef, m. 
king, $onig, w. 

kind, what — of, tt>ci8 fiir (ein). 
knife, Sfteffer, «. 
knight, fitter, m. 
knock, flopfen ; some one is — ing, 
e§ flopft. 



know, rDiffen (251); (be acquainted 
with) fennen (251); you — , 
bod). 



labor, arbeiten. 

lady, 2)ctme, / / young — , gran* 

letn, n. 
land, £anb, n. 
language, @prad)e, /. 
large, grog (156). 
lark, £erd)e,/ 
last, oorig. 
laugh, tad) en. 
lay, (egen. 
lead, yiiljrert. 
leaf, SBfott, n. 
learn, lernen. 

leave, 5Ibfd)ieb, m. {pi. — e). 
left, tint ; to the — , linfs (227). 
lesson, Slufgabe,// ©tunbe,/ 
let, taffen (241, 209). 
letter, 23rief, m. 
lie, liegen, f. (239); — down, fid) 

tegen. 
lighten, bitten. 
like, tieben, gern Ijaben; ntbgen 

(250); I should — to, id) mod)te 

gern; — to (with verbs), gem. 
little, llein; tnenig; a — , ein 

toenig. 
live, leben; (dwell) tt)oI)nen. 
London, bonbon, n. 
long, adj., lang ; adv., lange. 
look at, cm*fet)en (239). 
lord, Lord, §err, m. (121) 
lose, oerlieren (246). 
love, Ueben. 



134 



VOCABULARY. 



M 

maiden, 2ftcibd)en, ». 

make, tnadjen. 

man, Wlann, m. (231); {human 

being) 3Renf<f), m. (119). 
many, tri ete, tncmdjer (60) ; — a, 

manner. 
March, Sftctq, w. 
Mary, 9ftarie,/ 
master, §err, m. (121). 
May, 2ftctt, #*. 
may, tnogen (250); {be permitted) 

biirfen (250). 
Max, 3Rar, m. 
meanwhile, inbeffen. 
meat, gteifdj, n. 
meet, begegnen, f. (<&/.). 
mend, au^beffcrn. 
merchant, $aufmamt, m. (129). 
messenger, 23ote, w. 
midnight, 9JUttemad)t,/ (^/. *e). 
million, Sftiliion,/ 
mine, tnetner, bcr metne, ber met* 

ntge (198). 
mineral, 9Jftnerat, n. (130). 
minute, 9Jttnu'te,/ 
miss, Miss, grcmtein, n. 
Monday, 9ttontctg, m. {pi. — e). 
money, (Mb, n. 
month, 2ftonat, m. {pi. - e ). 
more, mefyr (156). 
morning, 9ftorgen, m. {pi — ); in 

the — , tnorgenS (227); this 

(yesterday) — , Ijeute (geftem) 

frill), 
most, ntcift (156). 
mother, Gutter,/ (97). 
Mr., §err, m. (121). 



Mrs., grctu,/ 

much, toiet (183). 

music, SUhiftF,/ 

must, tniiffen (250). 

my, mein (64). 

myself, refl., mid), mtr (191) e 

N 

name, n., 9?ame, m. (233); v. 

nemten (251); be — d, fyeigen 

(245). 
near, adj., nafj (156); prep., bei 

{dat.). 
neighbor, 9?ad)bar, m. (234). 
nephew, 9?effe, m. 
Nest, 9faft, n. 

never, me, niemals ; mmmer. 
nevertheless, bemtod), bod). 
new, neu. 

newspaper, 3 e ^ utI 9r/ 
next, nadjft (156). 
nigh, nal) (156). 
night, 9?ad)t,/ {pl. M c)- 
nightingale, ^adjtigatt,/ 
nine, neun. 
nineteen, neumjelm. 
ninety, tteunjig. 
no, adj., fein (63); adv., netn; — 

one, niemanb (194). 
noble, ebet. • 
nobody, niemanb (194). 
none, fetner (196). 
noon, 9)?tttag, m. {pi. — e). 
not, nid)t ; — yet, nodj ntdjt; — a, 

fein (63) ; — any, leiner (196). 
nothing, iti d)i§ {indecl.). 
now, je£t, nun. 
November, 9£o&emoer, m. 



VOCABULARY. 



135 



occupy, beioolmen. 

October, October, m. (pi. — ). 

Of, 00H (dat.). 

often, oft. 

old, alt. 

on, ctuf (110), an (110). 

once, einft. 

one, adj., ein (62); pron., man, 
einer (196); some—, jemanb 
(194); no—, niemanb (194), 
feiner (196); this — , biefer (59); 
that — , jener (60), ber (125). 

only, nur. 

opposite to, gegeniiber (dat., 215). 

or, ober. 

order {purchases), beftellen. 

order, in — that, bamit, baft. 

other, anber. 

ought, fotfen (250). 

our, unfer (64). 

ours, imf(e)rer, ber unj(e)re, ber 
unf(e)rige (198). 

ourselves, refl., un§. 

out of, am (dat.). 

over, itber (110). 



pain, £etb, n. 

painting, ©ematbe, n. (98). 

pair, -faar, n. (pi. — e). 

paper, ^a^er', n, 

Paris, $arig, n. 

partly, teitt (227). 

pass, retdjen. 

past, (161), nad) (dat.) ; auf 

(ace). 
path, 2£eg, m. (j>l. — e). 



peace, griebe, m. (233). 

pen, geber,/ 

people, 2eute,//. 

perhaps, oielleid)!'. 

permitted, be — , biirfen (250). 

picture, 23ilb, n. 

piece, ©titcf, n. (pi. — e). 

plant, pfkmgen. 

plate, Seller, m. 

play, v., f^ielen ; n., ©djaufoiet, n. 
(pL-t). 

pleasant, angeneljm. 

please, gef alien (241, dat.); (re- 
quest) bitte. 

pocket, %a\$t,f. 

point, be on the — of, eben mollen 
(250). 

poor, arm. 

pound, ^Pfunb, n. (pL — e). 

praise, loben. 

present, fdjenfen. 

presume, I — , ttofyl. 

pretty, r)iibfct). 

probably, tooljl. 

professor, ^rofeffor, m. (234). 

pupil, ©djiiler, m. 

purpose, motten (250). 

put on, (clothing) an^teljen (246); 
(hat) auf-fe^en. 

Q 

quarter, SBiertel, n. 
queen, $bnigin,/ 
quick, fdmett. 

R 
raft, glofj, n. (pi. *e). 
railroad, Sifenba^n,/ 
rain, »., 9tegen, m,; v., regnen. 



136 



VOCABULARY. 



rap, flop fen. 

rarely, felten. 

ray, ©tratjl, m. (234). 

reach, retdjen. 

read, lefen (239). 

recall, ftdj cvumexn(gen.,or an,acc). 

receive, erfyatten (241), empfangen 

(242); (we/come) empfangen. 
red, rot. 

rejoice, ftdj freuen. 
remain, bletben, \. (245). 
remember, fid) erinnem (gen., or 

an, ace). 
reply, cmttoorten (dat.pers.). 
request, bitten (nm, ace. thing). 
Rhine, $KI)etn, m. 
rich, reid). 
right, adj., redjt ; *., $ed)t, n. (J>1. 

— e); be -r- (adj.), red)t (noun) 

Ijaben; to the — , reacts (227). 
rise (sun, etc.), auf-gefyen, f. (242). 
river, glufc, m. (gen. — ffe«). 
road, 2Beg, **. (P l > — *)• 
robber, dauber, w. 
Rome, Sftom, n. 
Roman, Corner, m. 
roof, Qad), n. 
room, 3inimer, n. 
rose, $Koje,/ 
run, laufen, \. (243). 

S 

same, the — , berfetbe. 

Saturday, ©onnabenb, m. (j>l. — e). 

say, fagen ; be said, fatten (250). 

scholar, ©d)iiler, m. 

school, ©djule, / 

search, fud)etu 



seat, take a — , fid) fe£en. 

see, fe^en (239). 

seek, fudjen. 

seem, foremen (245). 

seldom, felten. 

sell, oerfaufen. 

send, fenben (251). 

September, (September, m. 

servant, £>tener, m. 

serve, btenen (dat.). 

set, (sun, etc), unter^geljen, f. 

(242) ; — across, iiber^e^en. 
seven, fteben. 
seventeen, fteb$el)n. 
seventy, fieb^ig. 
shall, fottett (250); (future) mes 

ben, f. (248). 
she, fte (93). 
shine, fdjeuten (245). 
shoe, ©d)itf), m. (pi. — e). 
shop, 2ctben, m. 
shore, lifer, n. (j>l. — ). 
short, fur$. 
show, geigen. 
silver, ©ttber, n. ■ 
since, prep., \ ett (dat.) ; conj., b(J. 
sing, jtngen (237). 
sister, ©djtnefter,/. 
sit, fifeen (239); —down, ftdj 

fefeen. 
six, fedjS. 
sixteen, fec^elm. 
sixty, jed)3ig. 
sleep, (d)Iafen (241). 
small, llein. 
snow, fdjneten. 
so, \o; is it not — , nidjt tnaljr; — 

that, taunt, bafc. 



VOCABULARY. 



137 



soft, fctnft (comp., fanfter). 
some, (182), ettt>a8 (indecl.), 

eirtige; — one, Jemanb (194). 
somebody, jemanb (194). 
something, ettva% (indecl.), 
son, ©olm, m. 
song, £ieb, n. 
soon, batb. 
sorrow, Setb, n. 
sorry, I am — , e§ tut nttr letb. • 
sort what — of, roa$ fiir (ein). 
speak, fpredjen (238). 
spectacle, ©d)auftrie(, w. (j>l. — e). 
splendid, ijerrttdj, pradjttg. 
spoon, £offe!, m. 
spring, grii^ling, m. 
stand, fleljett (240). 
steal, fterjten (238). 
still, ^^., nod). 
stone, ©teht, **</ precious — , 

(Sbetjtein. 
stove, £)fen, m. 
straight ahead, gerabe au$. 
street, ©trage, / 
strong, [tar!. 

student, ©tubenf, m. (119). 
study, n. f ©tubium, n. (130) ; v. 

ftubieren (178). 
subject, Untertan, m. (234) 
such, folcrjer (60, 196). 
sugar, 3ucfer, m. (j>L —). 
summer, ©ommer, m. (pi. —1). 
sun, (Sonne, /. 

Sunday, ©omttag, m. (j>l. — e). 
surely, bod), 
sweet, fug. 

Switzerland, bic @cjjn)et$. 
sword, ©djmert, n. 



table, £ifdj, m. 

tailor, @d)netber, m. 

take, nefjmen (238). 

tall, grog (156). 

teach, leljren. 

teacher, Eefyrer, m, 

tell, fagen. 

ten, geijit. 

than, al8. 

that, dem., jener (60), ber (125), 

biefer (59), berjemge ; rel. (149 , 

twelver, ber, ttm8 (184); conj., 

ba$; in order — , so — , bdtttit 

bag. 
the, ber (54). 

theatre, Sljea'ter, n. (j>I. — ). 
their, tf)r (64). 
theirs, iljrer, ber tr)re / ber ir)rige 

(198). 
themselves, refl. t fid) (191). 
there, ba, bort. 
therefore, bafyer, alfo. 
they, fte (93); (indef.) man (196). 
thine, beiner, ber beine, ber beinige 

(198). 
think, benfen (251); (believe) 

gtauben (dat.pers); I — , bod). 
third, adj., britt ; «., 2)rittet, n. 
thirsty, be — , bitrften ; I am — , e8 

bitrftet mid), 
thirteen, bret$efm. 
thirtieth, breigigft. 
thirty, bretgig. 
this, biefer (59), ber (125). 
thou, \>vl (86). 
though, bod). 
thousand, taujeub. 



138 



VOCABULARY. 



three, brei. 
through, bltrdj (ace). 
thunder, bonnern. 
Thursday, 2)onner8tag, m. (/>/. 

-e). 
thy, beitt. 

thyself, refl., bid}, bir (191). 
till, bt$. 
time, 3ett,/; {repetition) maf ; 

for a long — , tangc ; ten — s, 

getynmaL 

tired, miibc. 

to, gu (<&/.), « a( ^ (<&'.); (161) Dor 

(dat.) t auf (off.). 
to-day, Ijeute. 
to-morrow, ntorgen ; day after — , 

ubermorgen. 
too, au; {also), audj. 
toward(s), natf) (dat.), gegen (<*<-<:.). 
translate, itberfe^en. 
travel, retfen, j. 
traveler, bcr Sftetfenbe (145). 
tree, SBaunt, m.; apple—, %p\th 

baum. 
true, toaljr ; is it not — , nidjt 

tuafyr. 
Tuesday, 2)ienflag, m. (pi. — e). 
twelfth, 3tt)oiftel, n. 
twelve, jrtjolf. 
twenty, stoanjig. 
twig, 3^**9/ m.; apple — , 2tyfef* 

jtoetg. 
two, groei. 



uncle, Dnfel, m. (j>l. — ). 
under, unter (110). 
understand, toerftetyen (240). 



until, Bi8. 
upon, auf (110)* 



valley, XaX, n, 
very, fefyr. 
village, 2)orf, n. 
violet, SSetldjen, n* 

W 

wagon, SSagen, m. (pi. — ). 

waiter, $ettner, m. 

walk, take a — , tya$ieren ger)en 

f. (242). 
wall, 2Banb,/ (pl^t). 
wander, tnanbern, f. 
warm, ttmrm. 
watch, Uljr, / 
water, SBctffer, n. (pi.—). 
way, 2Beg, m. 
we, ttnr (83). 
wear, tragen (240). 
weather, ^Better, n. 
Wednesday, Mtttood), m. (pi 

-e). 
week, SSodje,/ 
welcome, empfangen (242). 
well, adj., rt»or)l ; «^., gut. 
well-behaved, artig. 
what, adj., toeldjer (60) ; pron., 

toa8 (116, 149) ; — (a), nm8 

fur (ein), toetd) (etn) (196). 
what(so)ever, toa8. (Cy« «&* 

213.) 
when (219), ttemt, at«, ttmtra. 
where, too ; (whither) toolun. 
whether, ob. 



VOCABULARY. 



139 



which, inter., roetdjer (60) ; rel., 

feeder, ber (149) ; that—. ba«, 

tta*. 
white, toeig. 
whither, tropin. 
who, inter., roer (116) ; >v/., tveU 

djer, ber, njer (149). 
whoever, roer. (<y «/w 213). 
whole, gan^. 
why, toarum. 
wife, gran,/ 
will, ttoilen (250) ; {future) xotx* 

ben, f. (248). 
William, SBifljelm, w. ' 
willingly, gent, 
wine, SBein, m. 
winter, SBtnter, m. 
wish, roitnfdjen ; rootten (250), 
with, mit (dat.) t bei (dat.). 
without, ofyne {ace). 
woman, grcm,/ 
wonder, tmmbent ; I — , e8 roun* 

bert mid). 



woods, Satb, /w- (231). 
work, arbeiten. 
write, fcfyreiben (245). 
wrong, Unredjt, n.; be — (adj.); 
unredjt (noun) Ijaben. 



ye, if)r (86). 

year, 3ctljr, «. (pi — e). 

yes, ja. 

yesterday, geftern ; day before — , 

torgeftern. 
yet, adv., nod) ; conj., bennod), 

bod) ; not — , nod) nidjt. 
you (57), bu (86), ifyr, @ie 

(102). 
young, Jung. 

your (64), bein, ener, 3§r. 
yours, cf. 198. 
yourself (selves), rejl. (191). bid) 

bir ; end) ; fid). 



APPENDIX. 



GERMAN SCRIPT. 



• 228. While it is not necessary for beginners to use 
the German script, it is important that they should at 
least learn to read it soon. The written alphabet is as 
follows : — 



Capital. Small. Equivalent. 



^Ol/ 







sf 



c/V 




A a 

B b 

C c 

D d 

E e 

F f 

G g 



Capital. Small. Equivalent. 



H h 




J 





J£J 



s^**^ 



I 


i 


J 


J 


K 


k 


L 


1 


M 


m 



^^ N n 



140 



GERMAN SCRIPT. 



141 



Capital. Small. Equivalent. 

(y ^ o o 



fr 




9? 



^X" 



P P 
Q q 

R r 



ffljftffi) S s (sz) 



T t 



Capital. Small. Equivalent. 

Of?/*? v » 



If 




UMLAUTS. 



(yt/^oc (y^t 

A a 



1 6 



W w 

X x 

Y y 

Z z 



U 



H2 APPENDIX. 

EXAMPLES. 






0^7/^. 






<// J s? / / / 



r / ^j^^r>^ 







GERMAN SCRIPT. 143 






t*^ 



7 7 / / 



144 APPENDIX. 

NOUNS. 

229. Masculines of the first class (cf. § 97), which 
modify in the plural : — 

SIcfer, field, Sfyfet, apple, SBoben, jftw, $ogen, bow, 
Sruber, brother, gaben, thread, ©arten, garden, ©raben, 
<£&£, §afen, harbor, §ammet, raw, jammer, hammer, 
§anbet, business, Saben, jA*/, Sftangel, w^^/, Sftantet, <:/##/£, 
Siabel, navel, Sftagel, *#*/, Dfen, £frztt, ©attet, saddle, 
©djaben, //«m, ©djnabel, fc»£, ©djtoager, brother-in-law, 
33ater, father, 83oget, #z><^. Some of the above words are 
occasionally not modified, and some other words not 
noted here are occasionally modified in the plural. " 

230. Nouns of the Second Class (cf. § 104) : — 

a. Monosyllabic masculines of the second class, 
which do not modify in the plural : — 

Slat, eel, 9Tar, eagle, Strm, arm, Skfud), visit, $8orn, 
fountain, SDadjg, badger, Sold), dagger, 2)od)t, wick, 2)otn, 
cathedral, ©ortt, thorn, 2)ntcf, print, gorft, forest, ©rab, 
degree, (Ban, province, ©aunt, palate, «£)aH, sound, §atm, 
stalk, Isanti), breath, £uf, hoof, |nmb, ^f, $ratt, crane, 
2ad)3, salmon, Saut, sound, 2ud)3, /y«^r, 2um£, ragamuf- 
fin, Wloxb, murder, Drt, //#<^, $)3arf, /#r£, 5j5fab, /atf/*, 
5)3fau, peacock, tyuU, pulse, ^Mtft, /<?*«/, $)3unfd), punch, 
Quaft, ta.^/, ©djuft, wretch, @d)uf), ^^, (Star, starling, 
©toff, tf«^, Salt, #>»*, Sag, ^7, Sfjrott, throne, Sob, 
death, %xnpp t troop, %u\§, flourish, 33erfud), *w/. There 
are variations in usage as noted in the preceding para- 
graph. 



nouns. 145 

b. Feminines belonging to the second class : — 
SIngft, anxiety, %&, ax, SBcmf, bench, 23raut, bride, 
Srunft, fervor, 23ruft, breast, gauft, fist, gtud)t, flight, 
%xu6)t, fruit, ®an§, goose, ©ruft, vault, ®nn% favor, §anb, 
hand, §aut, skin, Sluft, *&//, ®raft, strength, SM), ^w, 
Sunft, #rA £au£, louse, Suft, #*>, Suft, pleasure, 9Kad)t, 
might, 3#agb, wtf^, 9J£aa3, mouse, Sftadjt, #^*, Sfaf)!, 
^^w f 9fot, #m/, Sftuf;, /zz//, ©cut, sow, ©djtmr, string, 
@d)ttmlft, swelling, ©tabt, «Yp, 2Bcmb, ze/#//, 9Burft, &*«- 
$dg?j 8 U( ^t training, ^unft, guild ; with variations in 
usage as before. 

£. Monosyllabic neuters belonging to the second 
class : — 

23eet, {flower) bed, Skit, hatchet, Skin, leg, Soot, boat, 
SBrot, draw/, £)tng, thing, (£rj, <?r*, gell, A/^fe, ffift, feast, 
©ift, poison, iQaax, hair, §eer, ^rwj/, «£)eft, exercise-book, 
Sctfjr, jtfflr, 3ocf), ^fe, ®ttte, £«**, Sre% ^r^?^, £o3, /<?/, 
8KaJ3, measure, Xfteer, ocean, ^aar, /#*>, Spferb, A^r^, 
SPfwtb, pound, sputt, flferi, 9M)t, n^-A/, 8te§, ra?, SReidf), 
empire, Stiff, ra?/, 9toi)r r reed, 9foJ3, ^to^/, @alj, W/, 
©dfjaf, jA^/, ©djiff, 5-^^)), ©cfjtoem, swine, Sett, n^, ©ieb r 
sz>z^, ©ptet, //ay, ©tiicf, /zV^, 2ier, animal, £or, £»#, 
SSerf, «/0r£, gelt, tent, geug, stuff, Qid, goal ; with varia- 
tions in usage as before. 

231. Masculines and polysyllabic neuters belonging 
to the third class (cf. § 113): — 

Masculines : $8ofetmd)t, scamp, ©etft, spirit, ©ott, God, 
Cetb, body, 2Karm, man, Drt, place, 9fanb, edge, S3ormunb, 



146 APPENDIX. 

guardian, 3Bcttb, forest, SBitrm, worm; neuters: ©ernad), 
apartment, ©emiit, mind, ©efcfjledjt, sex, ©eftd)t, face, ©e* 
fpenft, spectre, ©etoanb, garment, Regiment, regiment, !qo& 
pttat, hospital. (Also nouns in -turn). There are 
some variations in usage as before. 

232. Weak monosyllabic masculines (cf. § 119) : — 
2If)tt, forefather, 23ftr, bear, SBurjd), young fellow, ©fyrift, 

Christian, ^tn!, finch, $iirft, prince, ©raf, count, §etb, 
hero, §err, gentleman, §trt, shepherd, 9#enfd), ratf/z, Sftofjr, 
J/^r, 9?arr, jfa?/, -Kerb, nerve, Qtffi, ox, ^rtng, prince, 
©djenf, cupbearer, (Scfjo^, wether, ©pa£, sparrow, Straufc, 
ostrich, %or, J&0/. 

233. Masculines with defective stem (cf. § 127).: — 
gefe, cliff, ^xkbe, peace, ^urite, spark, ©ebcmfe, thought, 

©Ictube, belief, §aafe, A***/, 9iame, name, Same, j^rf, 
SBille, ze/z//, @d)abe, A#r/^ ; also bct3 ^erj, //%£ Aiarf. 

234. Words belonging to the mixed declension 
(§ 128): — 

Masculines: 23auer, peasant, ©ebatter, godfather, Sor= 
beer, laurel, Stfcrft, mast, 9ftu£fet, muscle, 9latf)bax, neigh- 
bor, Spantoffel, slipper, ©comers, pain, See, lake, ©taat, 
.ytajv, ©tacfjel, ^00*/, ©trafjl, ny, Untertan, subject, SSetter, 
cousin, ^terrat, ornament; neuters: 9Iuge, *j£, Sett, <W, 
@nbe, end, §emb, j/^>/, Df)r, ear, 2Bef), />#z>z / also some 
nouns of foreign origin, especially those ending in un- 
accented or (which shift the accent in the plural. Thus : 
Sprofcffor, //., Sprofejio'ren). There are variations in 
usage as before. 



VERBAL FORMS. 



147 



VERBAL FORMS. 

235. As the verbal forms have been scattered through 
the Lessons, a series of paradigms is here given for more 
convenient reference. The translations into English are 
merely suggestive (cf. §§ 74, 164). 

a. Conjugation of a Weak Verb, Active and Passive : — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

loben, lobte, gelobt 



Indicative (§ 73). 

tdj lobe, I praise, etc. 
bit lobft, thou praisest 
er lobt, he praises 

totr loben, iv e praise 
ir)r lobt, jk#// praise 



ACTIVE. 



PRESENT. 



Subjunctive (§ 170). 



id) lobe, I may praise, I praise, etc, 
bit tobeft, />fo# may est praise 
er lobe, //£ w#y praise 

totr toben, w* ?//#/ praise 
i^r lobet, j^w w^y praise 
(©te) fie loben, Cv^«) they praise (6te) fte loben, (you) they may 

praise 



PRETERIT. 



id) lobte, I praised, etc. 

bu lobteft, thou praisedst 
er lobte, he praised 

ttrir lobten, 2^ praised 
it)r lobtet, jK£w praised 



id) lobte, I might praise, 1 praised \ 

etc. 
bu lobteft, thou mightest praise 
er lobte, he might praise 

nrir lobten, we might praise 
\$)X lobtet, you might praise 



(@te) fte lobten, (you) they praised (©te) fie lobten, (you) they might 

praise. 



148 APPENDIX. 



id) r)abe gelobt, I have praised, etc. id) rjabe geto6t r I may have praised, 

I have praised, etc. 

bu Ijaft gelobt, thou hast praised bu Ijabeft gelobt, thou may est have 

praised 

er r)at gelobt, he has praised er rjabe gelobt, he may have praised 

fair Ijaben gelobt, we have praised fair Ijaben gelobt, we may have 

praised 

ifjr rjabt gelobt, you have praised ifjr r)a6et gelobt, /^w may have 

praised 

(©ie) fie r)aben gelobt, {you) they (6ie) fie rjaben gelobt, (j<w) ///<?/ 
have praised may have praised 

PLUPERFECT. 

id) rjatte gelobt, I had praised, etc. idj rjcttte gelobt, 7 w/^/ have 

praised, I had praised, etc. 

buljatteft gelobt, thou hadst praised bu rjatteft gelobt, thou mightest 

have praised 

er t)atte gelobt, he had praised er Ijatte gelobt, ^* m/^/// have 

praised 

fair fatten gelobt, we had praised fair fatten gelobt, we might have 

praised 

it)r r)attet gelobt, /0# had praised tr)r rjattet gelobt, j^« ////£#/ ^w 

praised 

(Sie) fie fatten gelobt, (you) they ((Sie) fie fatten gelobt, (you) they 
had praised might have praised 

FUTURE. 

id) faerbe loben, 7 shall praise, etc. id) faerbe Ioben, /shall praise, etc. 
bu fairft loben, thou wilt praise bu faerbeft loben, thou wilt praise 
er fairb loben, he will praise er faerbe loben, he will praise 

fair faerben loben, we shall praise fair faerben loben, we shall praise 

ir)r faerbet loben, you shall praise iljr faerbet loben, you shall praise 

(<Ste) fie faerben loben, {you) they (<5ie) fie faerben loben, (you) they 

shall praise shall praise 



VERBAL FORMS. 149 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe gelobt Ijctfceu, I shall have idj ioerbe gelobt l)abeu, I shall have 

praised, etc. praised, etc. 

bu toirft gelobt Ijabeu, //fow wilt bu toerbeft gelobt l)abeu, thou wilt 

have praised have praised 

er toirb gelobt l^abeu, he will have er toerbe gelobt I)obeu, /#£ w*7/ ^w 

praised praised 

ttrir toerbeu gelobt Ijabeu, w*? jv^// toir toerbeu gelobt Ijabeu, w^ j&z// 
^# w praised have praised 

iljr toerbet gelobt Ijabeu, you will iljr toerbet gelobt Ijabeu, you will 
have praised have praised 

(©ie) fie toerbeu gelobt Ijabeu, (you) (©ie) fte toerbeu gelobt Ijabeu, (you} 
they will have praised they will have praised 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

idj toiirbe lobett, I should praise, idj toiirbe gelobt Ijabeu, / should 

etc. have praised, etc. 

bu toiirbeft lobett, thou wouldst bu toiirbeft gelobt l)abeu, thou 

praise wouldst have praised 

er toiirbe lobeu, he would praise er toiirbe gelobt Ijabeu, he would 

have praised 

toir toiirbeu lobeu, we should toir imirben gelobt Ijabeu, we should 
praise have praised 

it)r toiirbet lobeu, you would praise iljr toiirbet gelobt Ijabeu, you would , 

have praised 

(<Sie) fie toiirbeu lobeu, (you) they (@ie) fie toiirbeu gelobt Ijabeu, (you) 
would praise they would have praised 

IMPERATIVE. 

lobe (bu), praise (thou) lobet (iljr), praise (you) 

lobeu <5ie, praise (you) 

INFINITIVES. 

lobeu, to praise gelobt Ijabeu, to have praised 

PARTICIPLES. 

lobeub, praising gelobt, praised 



150 APPENDIX. 

PASSIVE (§§ 199-203). 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

id) toerbe gelobt, I am praised, etc. idj toerbe gelobt, / {may) be 

praised, etc. 

bu ttrirft gelobt, />to art praised bit merbeft gelobt, thou may est be 

praised 

er ttrirb gelobt, ^* is praised er werbe gelobt, ^^ «w^ fo praised 

ttrir tuerbett gelobt, w£ are praised ttrir ioerben gelobt, we may be 

praised 

tl)r toerbet gelobt, you are praised t^r toerbet gelobt, you may be 

praised 

((Erie) fie toerben gelobt, (you) they (<Sie) fie toerben gelobt, (you) they 
are praised may be praised 

PRETERIT. 

id) ttmrbe gelobt, I was praised, id) ttriirbe gelobt, 1 might be praised, 
etc. I were praised, etc. 

bu tourbeft gelobt, thou wast bu ttritrbeft gelobt, thou mightest 
praised be praised 

er ttmrbe gelobt, he was praised er ttmrbe gelobt, he might be 

praised 

ttrir ttmrbeu gelobt, we were ttrir ttmrbeu gelobt, we might be 
praised praised 

ttjr ttmrbet gelobt, you were t^r ttmrbet gelobt; you might be 
praised praised 

(<5ie) fie ttmrbeu gelobt, (you) (<5ie) fie ttmrbeu gelobt, (you) 
they were praised they might be praised 

PERFECT. 

idj bin gelobt toorben, / have been idjfei gelobt ttjorben, /(may) have 

praised, etc. been praised, etc. 

bu bift gelobt ttiorben bu feieft gelobt morben 

er tft gelobt tuorben er fei gelobt roorben 

ttrir finb gelobt ttiorben ttrir feien gelobt tt)orben 

it)r feib gelobt morben t^r feiet gelobt moreen 

((5ie) fie finb gelobt ttiorben (Sie) fie feien gelobt toorben 



VERBAL FORMS. 



ISI 



PLUPERFECT. 

id) toar gelobt toorbeu, I had been id) mare gelobt toorbeu, / might 



praised, etc. 
bu toarft gelobt toorbeu 
er toar gelobt toorbeu 
toir warm gelobt toorbeu 
iljr toaret gelobt toorbeu 
(©ie) fie toareu gelobt toorbeu 



have been praised, etc, 
bu toareft gelobt toorbeu 
er mare gelobt toorbeu 
toir toareu gelobt toorbeu 
iljr toaret gelobt toorbeu 
(8ie) fie toareu gelobt toorbeu 



FUTURE. 

idj toerbe gelobt toerbeu, / shall be id) toerbe gelobt merbeu, / shall be 



praised, etc. 
bu urirft gelobt toerbeu 
er toirb gelobt toerbeu 
toir toerbeu gelobt toerbeu 
iljr toerbet gelobt toerbeu 
(6ie) fie toerbeu gelobt toerbeu 



praised, etc. 
bu toerbeft gelobt toerbeu 
er toerbe gelobt toerbeu 
toir toerbeu gelobt toerbeu 
tt)r toerbet gelobt toerbeu 
(<Sie) fie toerbeu gelobt toerbeu 



FUTURE PERFECT. 

idj toerbe gelobt toorbeu feiu, I shall idj toerbe gelobt toorbeu feiu, I shall 



have been praised, etc. 
bu toirft gelobt toorbeu feiu 
er toirb gelobt toorbeu feiu 
toir toerbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu 
iljr merbet gelobt toorbeu feiu 



have been praised, etc. 
bu toerbeft gelobt toorbeu feiu 
er toerbe gelobt toorbeu feiu 
toir toerbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu 
iljr toerbet gelobt toorbeu feiu 



(<5ie) fie toerbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu (<Sie) fie toerbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu 



CONDITIONAL. 

idj tour be gelobt toerbeu, / should 

be praised, etc. 
bu toiirbeft gelobt toerbeu 
er toiirbe gelobt toerbeu 
toir toiirbeu gelobt toerbeu 
iljr toiirbet gelobt toerbeu 
(<3ie) fie toiirbeu gelobt toerbeu 



CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

idj toiirbe gelobt toorbeu feiu, 1 
should have been praised, etc. 
bu toiirbeft gelobt morbeu feiu 
er toiirbe gelobt toorbeu feiu 
toir toiirbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu 
tljr toiirbet gelobt toorbeu feiu 
(<5ie) fie toiirbeu gelobt toorbeu feiu 



152 APPENDIX. 

IMPERATIVE. 

toerbe (bit) gelobt, be (thou). toerbet (ifjr) gelobt, be (you) 

praised praised 

tt>er ben 6te gelobt, be (you) praised 

INFINITIVES. 

gelobt toerben, to be praised gelobt toorben fein, to have been 

praised 

PARTICIPLES. 

gelobt toerbenb, being praised gelobt toorben, been praised 

Note. — The passive of any transitive verb, whether weak or 
strong, separable or inseparable, may be formed by putting its 
past participle in the place of gelobt in the above paradigm. 

b. Conjugation of a Strong Verb : — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

ftngen, fang, gefungen 

Indicative (§ 76). Subjunctive (§ 170). 

PRESENT. 

tdj fhtge, I sing, etc. id) fhtge, I may sing, etc. 

bu ftngft bu ftngeft 

er ftngt er finge 

rotr ftngen ttnr fingen 

tfyr ftngt tljr ftnget 

(Ste) fie ftngen (©ie) fie ftngen 

PRETERIT. 

tdj fang, / sang, etc. tdj fange, I might sing, etc. 

bu fangft bu fangeft 

er fang er fange 

toir fangen totr fangen 

tr)r fangt ifjr fanget 

(<5tc) fie fangen (3te) fie fangen 



VERBAL FORMS. 1 53 



PERFECT. 



id) Ijctbe gefungen, / have sung, idj fjabe gefungen, / may have 

etc. sung, etc. 

5u §aft gefungen, etc. bu Ijabeft gefungett, etc. 



PLUPERFECT. 



idj fjatte gefungett, I had sung, etc. idj Ijdtte gefungen, / might have 

sung, etc. 
bu Ijatteft gefungen, etc. bu Ijatteft gefungen, etc. 



tdj toerbe ftngen, I shall sing, etc. idj merbe ftngen, I shall sing, etc. 
in tturft fingen, etc. bu toerbeft ftngen,- etc. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

idj toetbe gefungen fjaben, / shall id) toerbe gefungen fjaben, / shall 

have sung j etc. have sung, etc. 

bu mirft gefungen Ijaben, etc. bu merbeft gefungen f)aben, etc. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

idj ttmrbe ftngen, I should sing, etc. idj ttmrbe gefungen fjaben, I should 

have sung, etc. 
bu ttmrbeft ftngen, etc. bu ttmrbeft gefungen fyxben, etc, 

IMPERATIVE. 

ftnge (bu), sing (thou) ftnget (iljr), sing (you) 

fingen Se, sing (you) 

INFINITIVES. 

ftngen, to sing gefungen Ijaben, to have sung 

PARTICIPLES. 

ftngenb, singing gefungen, sung 



(54 APPENDIX. 

c. Compound tenses of a Verb with fein : — 

Indicative (§ 91). Subjunctive (§ 176). 

PERFECT. 

id) bin gefommen, I have come, id) fei gefommen, /may haze come, 

etc. etc. 

bu bift gefommen, etc. bu feteft gefommen, etc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id) toar gefommen, / had come, id) rota gefommen, / might have 

etc. come, etc. 

bu toarft gefomtnen, etc. bu tocireft gefommen, etc. 

FUTURE. 

id) toerbe fomtnen, I shall come, id) toerbe fommen, / shall come, 

etc. etc. 

bu nrirft fomtnen, etc. bu merbeft fommen, ^<r. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

tdj toerbe gefommen fein, I shall id) roerbe gefommen fein, / shall 

have come, etc. have come, etc. 

bu nurft gefommen fein, etc. bu toerbeft gefommen fein, etc. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) toiirbe fommen, I should come, id) toiirbe gefommen fein, I should 

etc. have come, etc. 

bu toiirbefi fommen, etc. bu toiirbeft gefommen fein, etCr 

INFINITIVES. 

fommen, to come gefommen fein, to have come 

PARTICIPLES. 

fommenb, coming gefommen, come 



VERBAL FORMS. I 5 5 

d. Conjugation of fjctben : — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

fjabeu, ^atte, geljabt 

Indicative (§ 61). Subjunctive (§ 162). 

PRESENT. 

tdj Ijabe, / have, etc. id) fyxbe, / may have, etc. 

bit Ijaft' bu ^abeft 

er f)at er fjabe 

ttrir f)abeu ttrir fjabeu 

iljr fjabt tljr fy*bet 

(@ie) fie fjaben (©ie) fie Ijabeu 

PRETERIT. 

id) fjatte, / A*ft/, *fc. idj Ijatte, I might have, etc. 

bu iatteft bu ^atteft 

er fjatte er IjjStte 

totr fatten toir fjdtten 

iljr t)attet . iljr Ijattet 

(<5ie) fie Ijatteu (©ie) fie fatten 

PERFECT. 

id) Ijabe geljabt, / have had, etc, id) Ijabe gefjabt, / may have had, 

bu Ijaft ge^abt bu t)aBeft gef)abt [etc. 

er r)at ge^abt er Ijabe ge^abt 

ttrir ^aben getjabt ttrir Ijabeu get)abt 

tf)r fyxbt ge^abt tr)r f)abet .gefjabt 

(Sie) fie fjaben ge^abt (@ie) fie f)abeu gefytbt 

PLUPERFECT. 

idj t)atte gef)abt, I had had, etc. idj t)dtte getjabt, I might have had s 

bu t)atteft gefyxbt bu fjatteft geljabt [etc. 

er l)atte geljabt er t)atte geljabt 

ttrir Ijatteu getjabt ttrir fjatteu getjabt 

if)x tyattet gefyabt U)r pallet geljabt 

«5ie)- fie Ijatteu geljabt (@te) fie fatten geljabt 



m6 



APPENDIX. 



tdj toerbe fyabtn, 1 shall have \ etc, 

bu ttrirft f)abeu 

er urirb f)aben 

ttnr toerbeu Ijaben 

iljr merbet Ijaben 

(©ie) fie toerbeu ^aben 



id) ttJerbe Ijabeu, ^ shall have, etc 

bu toerbeft fyiben 

er tuerbe f)abeu 

ttrir merben Ijabeu 

iljr toerbet f)abeu 

(<Sie) fie tt)erben ^aben 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



idj roerbe geljabt fjabeu, I shall have id) toerbe geljabt Ifyaben, / shall 



had, etc. 
bu ttrirft geljabt f)abeu 
er urirb geljabt Ijaben 
ttrir tuerben geljabt Ijaben 
iljr u>erbet geljabt Ijaben 
(<5ie) fie merben geljabt Ijaben 

CONDITIONAL. 

id) ttmrbe §aben, / should have, 

etc. 
bu ttmrbeft fjahtn 
er ttmrbe Ijaben 
ttrir ttmrben f)aben 
tt)r ttmrbet Ijaben 
(©ie) fie ttmrben Ijaben 



have had, etc. 
bu merbeft geljabt Ijaben 
er toerbe geljabt f)aben 
ttrir tt>erben gef)abt Ijaben 
iljr merbet geljabt Ijaben 
(@ie) fie tterben geljabt Ijaben 

CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

idj ttmrbe geljabt f)aben, / should 

have had, etc. 
bu ttmrbeft geljabt Ijaben 
er ttmrbe gefjabt Ijaben 
ttrir ttmrben gefyibt. Ijaben 
ir)r ttmrbet get)a6t Ijaben 
(Ste) fie ttmrben geljabt Ijaben 



IMPERATIVE. 

fyibe (bu), have (thou) Ijabet (\f)x),.have (you) 

Ijaben Sic, have (you) 



Ijaben, to have 



fjabenb, having 



INFINITIVES. 

geljabt Ijaben, to have had 

PARTICIPLES. 

geljabt, had 



VERBAL FORMS. 



*57 



e. Conjugation of fetn : — 





PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


fein, 


tr-ar, getr-efen 


Indicative (§ 56). 


Subjunctive (§ 174). 




PRESENT. 


id) bin, l am, etc. 


idj fei, / may be, etc. 


bu bift 


bu feieft 


er ift 


er fei 


ttrir finb 


ttrir feien 


tljr feib 


tl)r feiet 


(<Sie) fie ftnb 


(©ie) fie feien 




PRETERIT. 


id) tr»ar, I was, etc. 


id} tr-are, I might be, etc. 


bu tr-arft 


bu tr-areft 


er mar 


er roare 


ttrir tr-aren 


tt)ir tr-aren 


iljr tr-aret 


tftr tr-aret 


(@ie) fie tr-aren 


(6te) fie tr-aren 




PERFECT. 


idj bin getr-efen, I have been 


, etc. \$) fei getr-efen, 7 may havi 


bu bift getr-efen 


bu feieft getr-efen 


er ift getr-efen 


er fei getr-efen 


ttrir finb getr-efen 


ttrir feien gett>efen 


tt)r feib getr-efen 


iljr feiet getr-efen 


(<5ie) fie finb getr-efen 


(@ie) fie feien getr-efen 




PLUPERFECT. 


\ti) ttmr getr-efen, I had been. 


etc. idj tr-are getr-efen, I might hav 


bu tr-arft getr-efen 


bu tr-Sreft getr-efen 


er tr-ar getr-efen 


er ware getr-efen 


ttrir tr-aren getr-efen 


ttrir tt)aren getr-efen 


tr)r tr-aret getr-efen 


itjr tr-aret getr-efen 


(@ie) fie tt>aren getr-efen 


(@ie) fie tr-aren getr-efen 



{etc, 



{etc, 



158 



APPENDIX. 



id) roerbe fein, / shall be, etc. 

bu ttnrft fein 

er tturb fein 

wit toerben fein 

i^r merbet fein 

(<5ie) fie merben fein 



id) merbe fein, / ^#// be % etc. 

bn merbeft fein 

er tnerbe fein 

ttur merben fein 

i^r tnerbet fein 

(©ie) fie ttierben fein 



FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) roerbe getoefen fein, T shall have id) foerbe gemefen fein, T shall have 

been, etc. 
bu ttnrft gemefen fein 
er ttrirb getr-efen fein 
ttrir merben gemefen fein 
i^r tt)erbet geroefen fein 
(Sie) fie tt-erben getuefen fein 

CONDITIONAL. 

id) ttntrbe fein, I should be, etc. 

bu ttmrbeft fein 
er ttmrbe fein 
ttrir ttmrben fein 
i^r ttmrbet fein 
(6ie) fie ttmrben fein 



v, etc. 
bu toerbeft getuefen fein 
er toerbe gemefen fein 
tt)ir toerben gemefen fein 
t^r tr>erbet gemefen fein 
(©ie) fie merben gett>efen fein 

CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) ttntrbe getr-efen fein, / should 

have been, etc. 
bu ttmrbeft getuefen fein 
er ttmrbe gettjefen fein 
tt)ir ttJiirben gettjefeh fein 
tfjr ttmrbet gemefen fein 
(Sie) fie ttJiirben getoefen fein 



fein, to be 



IMPERATIVE. 

fet (bu), be (thou) feib (if)r), be (you) 

feien <5ie, be (you) 

INFTNITIVES. 

gemefen fein, to have been 



feienb, being 



PARTICIPLES. 

geraefen, been 



VERBAL FORMS. 



159 



/. Conjugation of toerben : — 



PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

merben, ttmrbe, gemorben 



Indicative (§ 79). 

idj toerbe, I become, etc. 
bu ttrirft 
er ttrirb 

ttrir toerbeu 
i!jr toerbet 
(Ste) fie merben 



Subjunctive (§ 175). 



PRESENT. 



id) toerbe, / ^ztf/ become, etc. 
bu toerbeft 
er toerbe 

toir toerben 
itjr toerbet 
(@ie) fie toerben 



idj ttmrbe (or toarb), 1 became, etc. idj ttmrbe, I might become, etc. 

bu tourbeft (or toarbft) bu toiirbeft 

er ttmrbe (or toarb) er toiirbe 

tt)ir tourben rntr toiirben 

if)r ttmrbet iljr miirbet 

(<5ie) fie tourben ((5ie) fie toiirben 



id) bin getoorben, / have become, id) fei getoorben, / may have be> 
etc. come, etc. 



bu 6ift getoorben 
er ift getoorben 

toir fiub getoorben 
iljr feib getoorben 
(6te) fie fiub gemorben 



bu feieft getoorben 
er fei getoorben 

mir feten gemorben 
tljr feiet getoorben 
(6ie) fie feieu gemorben 



i6o 



APPENDIX. 



PLUPERFECT. 



idj roar geroorben, I had been, etc, 

bu toarft getoorben 
ix roar gem or ben 
ioir toaren getoorben 
iljr toaret getoorben 
(<5te) fie toaren getoorben 



idj roare gem or ben, / might have 

been, etc. 
bu toareft getoorben 
er ware getoorben 
roir toaren getoorben 
iljr toaret getoorben 
(<5te) fie toaren geroorben 



id) toerbe toerben, / shall become, 

eh, 
bu roirft toerben 
ix toirb toerben 
totr roerben roerben 
ifyx roerbet toerben 
(@ie) fie roerben toerben 



id) toerbe roerben, / shall become, 

etc. 
bu toerbeft toerben 
er toerbe toerben 
totr roerben roerben 
tr)r roerbet roerben 
(@ie) fie roerben roerben 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



Idj toerbe geroorben jem, / shall 

have become, etc, 
bu roirft geroorben fein 
er roirb getoorben fein 
roir toerben getoorben fein 
itjr roerbet geroorben fein 
(©te) fie toerben getoorben fein 

CONDITIONAL. 

idj roitrbe roerben, I should become, 

etc. 
bu roitrbeft toerben 
er roitrbe roerben 
roir roitrben roerben 
iljr toitrbet roerben 
(©ie) fie roitrben toerben 



idj toerbe geroorben fein, / shall 

have become, etc. 
bu toerbeft getoorben fein 
er toerbe getoorben. fein 
roir toerben getoorben fein 
it)r roerbet geroorben fein 
(@ie) fie toerben getoorben fein 

CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

idj roitrbe getoorben fein, / should 

have become, etc. 
bu roitrbeft getoorben fein , 

er roitrbe getoorben fein 
roir roitrben getoorben fein 
iljr toitrbet geroorben fein 
(@ie) fie roitrben getoorben fein 



VERBAL FORMS. l6l 

IMPERATIVE. 

toerbe (bit), become {thou) toerbet (tfjr), become (you) 

toerben ©ie, beco?ne (you) 

INFINITIVES. 

toerben, to become getnorben fein, A? ^#w become 

PARTICIPLES. 

roerbenb, becoming gemorben, become 

g. Conjugation of a Separable Verb (§§ 185-189): — 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

anfangen, fing an, angefangen 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

id) fange an, I begin, etc. id) fcmge an, / may begin, etc. 

bu fangft an, etc. bu fangeft an, etc. 

PRETERIT. 

id) fing an, / began, etc. id) finge an, / might begin, etc^ 

bn fingft an, etc. bu fingeft an, etc. 

PERFECT. 

id) fjabe angefangen, I have begun, id) fjafie angefangen, / may have 

etc. begun, etc. 

bu Jjaft angefangen, etc. bu Ijabeft angefangen, etc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

\d) fjatte angefangen, / had begun, id) tjatte angefangen, / might have 

etc. begun, etc. 

bu r^atteft angefangen, etc. bu Ijatteft angefangen, eU 

FUTURE. 

id) merbe anfangen, I shall begin, id) toerbe anfangen, / shall begin % 

etc. etc. 

bu nrirft anfangen, etc. bu tnerbeft anfangen, etc. 



1 62 APPENDIX. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

idj merbe angefangen tjaben, I shall idj merbe angefangen fjaben, I shall 

have begun, etc. have begun, etc. 

bu ttrirft angefangen Ijaben, etc. bu toerbefi angefangen Ijaben, etc. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) amrbe anfangen, I should begin, id) tnurbe angefangen fjaben, I should 

etc. have begun, etc. 

bu nmrbeft anfangen, etc. bn nmrbeft angefangen Ijaben, etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

fange (bu) an, begin (thou) fanget (iljjr) an, begin (you) 

fangen 6ie an, begin (you) 

INFINITIVES. 

anfangen, to begin angefangen fjaben, to have begun 

PARTICIPLES. 

anfangenb, beginning angefangen, begun 

Present and Preterit Tenses of a Separable Verb con- 
jugated for a Subordinate Clause : — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

(bafj) id) anfange, (that) I begin, (baft) id) anfange, (that) I may 

etc. begin, etc. 

(baft) bu anfangft, etc. (baft) bu anfangeft, etc. 



(baft) idj anfing, (that) I began, (baft) id) anfinge, (that) / might 

etc. begin, etc. 

(baft) bn anfingft, etc. (baft) bu anfingeft, etc. 



VERBAL FORMS. 



1^3 



h. Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb (§§ 190-193): — 



PRINCIPAL PARTS. 



fid) freuen, freute fid), gefreut 

Indicative. Subjunctive, 



id) freue midj, / rejoice, etc. 
bu freuft bid) 
er freut fid) 

nrir freuen m% 
i^r freut eudj 
(<3te) fie freuen fid) 



tdj freute mid), / rejoiced, etc. 
bu freuteft bid}', etc. 



id} freue mid); I may rejoice, etc. 
bu freueft bid) 
er freue fidj 

rotr freuen un§ 
ifu* freuet eudj 
(@te) fie freuen fidj 



PRETERIT. 



id) freute mtdj, / might rejoice, etc. 
bu freuteft bid), etc. 



PERFECT. 



id) Ijabe mid) gefreut, / have 

joked, etc. 
bu Ijctft btdj gefreut, etc. 



re- id) fja6e mtdj gefreut, / may have 
rejoiced, etc. 
bu Ijabeft btdj gefreut, etc. 



PLUPERFECT. 



id) tjcttte mtdj gefreut, / had re- id) fjatte midj gefreut, / might have 

joked, etc. rejoiced, etc. 

bu Ijatteft btdj gefreut, etc. bu Ijatteft bid) gefreut, etc. 

FUTURE. 

tdj merbe mtdj freuen, / shall re- id) roerbe midj freuen, / shall re- 

joke, etc. joke, etc. 

bu mtrft btdj freuen, etc. bu merbeft bid) freuen, etc. 



1 64 APPENDIX. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

i&l merbe mid) gefreut fyxben, I shall tdj tt>erbe mtdj gefreut fjaben, I shall 

have rejoiced, etc. have rejoiced, etc. 

bu urirft bid) gefreut I)abeu, etc. bu tnerbeft bid) gefreut fjaben, ^. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

td) toiirbe mid) freueu, / should re- idj ttmrbe midj gefreut fjaben, I should 

joice, etc. , have rejoiced, etc. 

bu roitrbeft bid) freueu, etc. bu ttmrbeft bid) gefreut Ijabeu, etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

freue (bu) bid), rejoice (thou) freuet (iljr) eud), rejoice {you) 

freueu 8ie fidj, r#0*r* (j^) 

INFINITIVES. 

fid) freueu, to rejoice fidj gefreut Ijabeu, to hw* rejoiced 

PARTICIPLES. 

fid) freueub, rejoicing fid) gefreut, rejoiced (only in com- 

pound tenses) 

£ Conjugation of a Modal Auxiliary (§ § 205, 206 ) : — - 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

fouueu, fomtte, gefonut 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

id) fcmu, / can, etc. idj fonne, / can, etc. 

bu fannft bu fonneft 

er fanu er f oune 

tt)ir fonnen ttrir fouueu 

itjr f onut iljr f onnet 

(®ie) fie fouueu (©ie) fie fouueu 



VERBAL FORMS. 1 65 



Id) fortnte, / could, etc. id) f onnte, / could, etc. 

bit fonnteft, etc. bu fonnteft, etc. 



id) fjctfce gefonnt or fonnen, / have id) Ijabe gefonnt or tinmen, / may 

been able, I could, etc. have been able, I could, etc. 

bu r)aft gefonnt or fonnen, etc. bu fjabeft gefonnt or fonnen, etc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id) fjatte gefonnt or fonnen, / had id) tjatte gefonnt or fonnen, I might 
been able, I could have, etc. have been able, I could have., 

etc. 
bu fjatteft gefonnt or fonnen, etc. bu r)atteft gefonnt or fonnen, etc. 

FUTURE. 

idj toerbe fonnen, I shall be able, etc. id) merbe fonnen, I shall be able, etc. 
bu hrirft fonnen, etc. bu toerbeft fonnen, etc. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

id) toerbe gefonnt ^aben or Ijjaben id) toerbe gefonnt fyiben or ^ctben 
fonnen, I shall have been able, fonnen, / shall have been able, 

etc. etc. 

bu ttrirft gefonnt ^aben, etc. bu toerbeft gefonnt Ijaben, etc. 

CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

id) miirbe fonnen, I should be able, id) tourbe gefonnt fjaben or fjaben 
etc. fonnen, I should have been 

able, etc. 
bu nmrbeft fonnen, etc. bu tmirbeft gefonnt fyxben, etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Wanting. 



1 66 APPENDIX. 

INFINITIVES. 

fonnen, to be able gefonnt Jjaben or fjabert fonnett, to 

have been able 

PARTICIPLES. 

fomtenb, being able gefomtt, able 

Note. — The Inseparable Verb (cf. § 180) is omitted, as it 
differs from other verbs only in the absence of ge in its past parti- 
ciple. The Impersonal Verb (cf. § 195) is also omitted, as its 
conjugation differs in no way from that of the third personal singular 
of a weak or a strong verb. 

STRONG VERBS. 

236. The strong verbs are here given, arranged In 
classes according to the vowel of the preterit and past 
participle. Sufficient information is given in § JJ to 
guide in the formation of the imperative. Whenever 
the preterit or past participle has some irregularity in 
spelling or otherwise, the form is given. Regular forms 
are not given. The second and third persons singular 
of the present indicative are also given whenever they 
change their vowel. Observe that the infinitive, preterit, 
and past participle have each a different vowel in §§237 
and 238, that the infinitive and past participle have the 
same vowel in § § 239-243 (with a few exceptions), and 
that the preterit and past participle have the same 
vowel in the remaining verbs. The auxiliary is under- 
stood to be Jjaben unless f. (fetn) is noted. 

237. Preterit a, Past Participle u : — 

binben, bind geltngert, f., succeed (only in 

brtngen, f. r press third singular) 

ftnbett, find fltngen, sound 



STRONG VERBS. 



167 



miftfittgen, fail (see ge* ftnfen, f., sink 

lingen) fprtngen, f., spring 

rtngen,* wring fttnfen,* stink 

fd)ttngert, sling trtnfen,* drink 

fcl)lptnben f * f. f vanish ttrirtben, wind 

fdjtturtgert,* swing jttrirtgen, force 
ftrtgen, sing 

Note. — Verbs marked * have u occasionally in the preterit. 
238. Preterit a, Past Participle : — 
befetjlert,* command, -ftefjtft, ftetjlen,* steal, fttefjtft, ftiefjlt 



-fiefjtt 
bergen,f conceal, btrgft, btrgt 
berften,* f., burst, birfteft,btrft 
bred^en, break, bridjft, btidjt 
empfefylert,* recommend (set 

befet)Ien) 
gebarert, bear, -bterft, -biert 
gelten,* be worth, giltft, gilt 
^elfent(dat), help, ^Ufft, fjitft 
nefjmen, take, nimmft, rtimmt; 

p. p., genommen 
fcljeften,* scold, fdjiltft, frf)t(t 
[predjert, speak, ftmdjft, 

fd^redEen, be afraid, fdjrtcfft, 
fd^rtdEt (transitive weak) 
ftedjen, stick, fiict)ft, ftid)t 



fterben,t I, die, fttrbft, ftirbt 
treffen, hit, triffft, trifft; 

pret., traf 
t)erberben,t spoil, -btrbft, 

-birbt (trans, usually 

weak) 
roerben,t sue, totrbft, ttrirbt 
toerfen,f throw, ttrirfft, toirft 

beginnert,* begin 
gettnnnen,* win 
rtnnen,* ). t Jlow 
fdjttummen,* f., swim 
finnen,* think 



fpirmen,* spin 

fommert, f., come ; pret., lam 

Note. — Verbs marked * have and those marked f have u very 
commonly instead of a in the preterit subjunctive. The preterit in- 
dicative of these verbs occasionally has or u instead of a. 



1 68 APPENDIX. 

239. Preterit a, Past Participle e : — 
bitten, beg, ask ; pret., bat, gettejen, f., recover 

p. p., gebeten gefdE)et)en r f., happen, e3 ge- 
liegen, lie fd)te()t (only in 3d sing.) 

fifcen, sit ; pret., fafj; p. p., lefen, m*^, lief eft, lieft 

gefeffen meffen, measure, mijst, mifet 

fefjen, air, ftet)ft r fie£)t (im- 
effen, eat, ifct, ifct ; p. p., ge* per. also ftetje) 

geffen treten, f. f tread, trittft, trttt 

freffen, ^/, fri&t, frtfet fcergeffen, forget, — gtfet r 
geben, #k/*, gibft, gtbt -fli&t 

Note. — In the second singular iffeft, friffeft, etc., may be used 
instead of the form given, if$t, frigt, etc. % of the preterit is here 
long; so the subjunctive is age, frage, etc. (cf. §44). 

240. Preterit u, Past Participle a : — 

baden, bake, badft, bacft ; tragen, carry, tragft, tragt 

pret., but (often weak toacf)fett, grow, rucic^(fe)ft f 
except in past parti- tDadjft 

ciple) toafcljen, wash, tufifdj(e)ft, 

fafjren, f., drive, fatjrft, fafyrt mafdjt. 

graben, dig, grabft, grabt 

laben, Aawf fteljen, stand; pret., ftanb ; 

fd^affen, create p. p., geftanben (pret. 

fcf)lagen, strike, fdjlagft, fdjlfigt formerly ftuttb) 

241. Preterit ie, Past Participle a: — 

btafen, &foze>, Maf(ef)t, blaft fatten, hold, Mftft, pit 

braten, r^^, bratft, brat laffen, let, laftt or laffeft, taftt 

fallen, \., fall, fallft, fallt; ratcn, advise, ratft, rat 

pret., fiel fd)(afen f */**/, fdfjlafft, fd^laft 



STRONG VERBS. 



169 



242. Preterit t, Past Participle a: — 

fangen, catch, ffingSt, ffingt geljen, I, go; pret., gtng: 
Ijangett, hang, fyting^t, Ijangt p. p., gegangen 

243. Preterit te, Past Participle as Infinitive : — 

Ijcwen, hew ; pret., i)ieb rufen, shout, call 

laufen, f*/w», faufft, Ifiuft ftofeen, /»jA, ftfl&(ef)t, ftfl&t 

244. Preterit i, Past Participle t : — 

(fief)) fieftetften, **///? one's teiben, suffer; pret., fitt; p. 



6et^en, fo'te 

Metdjett, bleach (intransitive 
often, transitive always 
weak) 

gtetdjett, (intrans. dat.) r*- 
semble (transitive usu- 
ally weak, make simi- 
lar) 

gtetten, f., glide; pret., glttt ; 
p. p., gegttttert 

gretfen, seize; pret., griff; 
p. p., gegrtffen 

Jetfert, chide ; pret., Itff; p. 
p., geltffen 

fnetfen, pinch; pret., Iniff ; 
p. p., gefmffen 

frteipen, pinch ; pret., htip)p ; 
p. p., gefttippett (often 
weak) 



p., getittett 
pfetfett, whistle ; pret, pfiff; 

P. P-i flcpfiffett 
rei&en, tear 
rettett, f., ride; pret., rttt; 

p. p., gerttten 
fd)teitf)en, f. r sneak 
fdjtetfen, whet; pret., fdf)ltff ; 

p. p., gefdjttffett 
fdjtetfcen, slit (cf. § 44) 
fci)met^en f smite 
fd^tetben, cut ; pret., fd)mtt; 

p. p., gefdjmtten 
fdjreitett, f., stride; pret, 

fdjrttt; p. p., gefd)rit= 

fpletfcett, split 

ftretdjen, stroke 

ftrettett, contend; pret., ftrttt; 

p. p., geftrttten 
tt)etcE)ert f f., yield ; (weak 

when meaning soften) 



170 



APPENDIX. 



245. Preterit te, Past Participle te : — 
bletben, f., remain fdjroetgen, be silent (weak 



gebetfjen, f., thrive 

tetijen, lend 

metben, avoid 

preifen, praise 

retben, rub 

fdjetben, f., part (weak when 

meaning sever) 
fd^etnen, shine, seem 
fd)reiben, write 
fdjreten, scream 



when meaning silence) 
fyeten, spit 

ftetgen, f. f mount, rise 
treiben, drive 
toetfen, show 
jeitjen, accuse. 



f)etf$en, bid, call; 
Ijetften 



p. p., ge- 



246. Preterit 0, Past Participle : — 
a. Infinitive te (it). 

rtedjett, smell 



btegen, bend 

bteten, offer 

ftiegen, \. } fly 

fttefjen, \.,flee 

fltefcen, \. } flow 

frteren, freeze 

gemeJ3en, enjoy 

gtefeen, pour 

fief en (old inf. of litren) 

ftteben, cleave (generally 

weak) 
frtedjen, f., creep 
Wren, choose 
liigen, lie 



fdjteben, shove 
jdjte^en, shoot 
fd)ttefen, f., slip; pret., 

f^Ioff;p.p.,ge[^toffen 
fdjtteften, shut 
fdjmeben, snort 
fteben, &?/// pret, fott; p 

p., gefotten 
fprtefeen, f., sprout 
ftteben, f., disperse 
triefen, drip; pret., troff; 

p. p., getroffen 
trfigen, deceive 



STRONG VERBS. 



171 



berbrtefsen, vex Jtetjen, draw ; pret., jog; p. 

bertteren, lose p., gejogen 

toiegen, weigh 

b. Infinitive e. 
betoegen, (weak except when queHen, gush, qutUft, qutUt 



it means induce) 

breftfjert, thresh, brtf^eft, 
brifdE)t 

fec^ten f ^Mftc^(t)ft f ftc^t 

fIedE)ten f twine, fltrf)(t)ft, flid)t 
fItdE)t 

fjeben, raise (pret. also f)ub) 

tUmmm,press (usually weak 
except in beflemmen) 

melfen, milk, milfft, tntlft 

pftegen, practise, foster (usu- 
ally weak) 

c. Infinitive in other vowels. 



(transitive usually 
weak) 

fdjeren, shear, fcfyterft, fd^tert 

fdjmetjen, melt, fd)milj(ef)t, 
fdjmttst (transitive usu- 
ally weak) 

fdjtoeHen, f., swell, fcl)nrillft ( 
fdE)tDtKt (transitive 
weak) 

toeben, weave 



gar en , ferment 
gtimmett, gleam 
ftimmen, f., climb 
lofdjen, f., extinguish, Kf(fy> 

eft, ltfd)t (transitive 

weak) 
faufert, ^rz/z£, faufft, fauft 



flatten, sound (also weak) 
fd)ncmbett, snort 
fdjrauben, screw (also weak) 
fcf)toaren, suppurate 
fd)tooren, swear (pret. also 

fdjttmr) 
toagen, weigh (sometimes 

weak) 



jaugen, suck 

247. Preterit u (or rarely a), Past Participle u, 
bhtgen, engage fdjmbett, ^j 



172 APPENDIX. 

248. Tbe following are irregular: 

tun f do; pret., tat; p. p., getan 
toerben, f., become ; cf. § 235 c 
fetn, be; cf. § 235, b 

249. The following may have the forms here indi- 
:ated, but are usually weak : — 

fatten, fold ; past participle sometimes gefalten 
fragen, ask ; sometimes like fasten, but past partici- 
ple always gefragt . 
marten, grind; past participle gemat)ten 
radjen, avenge ; rarely strong like btegen except in 

past participle 
fatjen, salt; strong only in past participle gefaljen 
f patten, Split; strong only in past participle gefpat 

ten 
ftecEen, stick; rarely strong like ftedjen 
toirren, confuse ; strong only in past participle bet-* 
toorren 

Note. — Some of the strong verbs other than those so noted 
are occasionally weak or have variant forms. 

250. Modal Auxiliaries : — 

fonnen, can ; pres., fann, fannft, fann ; pret., fonntc ; 

p. p., gelonnt 
mogen, may ; pres., mag, magft, mag; pret, modjte; 

p. p., gemodjt 
bitrfen, be permitted ; pres., barf, barfft, barf; pret., 

burfte; p. p., geburft 
miiffen, must; pres., mnfc, muftt, mufc; pret, mnfcte, 

p. p., gemufet 



STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 1 73 

foffett, ought; pres., foil, foffft, foil; pret., foUte; p. 

p., gefoHt 
tooKen, will; pres., ttriK, toiHft, toiU; pret, toollte; 

p. p., getoollt 

Note. — The present indicative plural and the whole of the pres- 
ent subjunctive are made on the infinitive stem. The preterit sub- 
junctive of fonnen, ntogen, biirfett, tniiffen has the modified vowel. 
See Lesson XXVI. 

251. Irregular Weak Verbs, Principal Parts: — 
bretmen, burn, brcmrtte, gebrctmtt 
femten, know, fomtte, gefctnnt 
nenrten, name, ncmnte, genamtt 
remtett, f., run, rannte, geramtt 
fenbert, send, fanbte, gefanbt (also regular) 
toenben, turn, tocmbte, getocmbt (also regular) 
brtngen, bring, bradjte, gebradjt (pret subj., brittle) 
benfett, think, bad)te, gebad)t (pret subj., badjte) 
tt)tffert r know, touj^te, getDU^t (pres. indie, sing., toetfj, 

toetfet, toet§; pret. subj., toiifcte) 
Ijaben, have, fjatte, gefjabt (cf. 235, a) 

Note The preterit subjunctive is bremtte, femtte, etc., unless 

otherwise indicated. 

LIST OF STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 

In the following list are given the infinitive, the preterit indicative and preterit 
subjunctive, and the past participle of the German strong and irregular verbs. The 
second and tnird person singular of the present indicative and the second person 

singular of the imperative are also given whenever irregular. A dash indicates 

that forms so marked are regular (that is, according to the rules of the weak conjuga- 
tion). Forms in parenthesis are unusual. As in the Vocabulary cognates are printed 
in full-faced type. Verbs are to be conjugated with b,aben unless f. (fetn) or f. or b. 
follows the infinitive. Numbers refer to paragraphs in the Appendix where the 
verbs are treated in classes. 



174 



APPENDIX. 



Infinitive. 



batten, 1 bake 
=baren, only 

befehlcn, com- 
mand 
beffeiften, see 
begtnnen, begin 

betften, bite 

bergen, conceal 

betften, f./ burst 

bctticgcn, 2 induce 
biegen, bend 
btctctt, offer 
btnben, bind 
bitten, beg 
Mafeit, blow 
Wetbett,f., remain 
bleuhett, 4 bleach 
bratcit, roast 
urerf)cn f break 
bremten, burn 
brtltrtcn, bring 
=beiben, only 
benfett, think 

sbcrbCtt, only in 
bUtgeit, 5 engage 
brefchett, thresh 

sfcrteftett, only in 

bringen, f., press 

biirfeit, be per- 
mitted 

cmjjfcblen, rec- 
ommend 

effett, eat 

fabreit, f. or b,, 
drive 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. * 



Mffft bacft 
** gebarett, 

befteblft, 

befter?It 

fleiftett 



btrgft birgt 
birjiefl, birlr 



biaf(ef)t, bldfi 



bratft, brat 
bridjfi, brtdjt 



in gebeibett, 



tocrbcrbcu, 



brtfdjeft, 

brifd?t 

berbrieftett, 



barf, barffi, 
barf 

empfterflfl, 
empftcb,It 
tff(ef)t i%t 
fdtjrfr, fabrt 



Preterit 
Indie. 



uuf 

•which see. 
befabt 



begamt 

bift 
batg 

batft 

borfr 

betoog 

bog 

**t 

banb 

bat 

bficd 

blieb 

bltrb 

brtet 

bvaa) 

btatmtc 

bvaa)te 

which see. 

bad)te 

which see. 
bung (bang) 
bVrtfcf) 
(brofdj) 
which see. 

brang 
burfte 

cmbfabl 

aft 
fubt 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



bfife 

befafyle 
before 

beqanne 

begonne 

biffc 

barge, 

barge 

bdr|ie 

borfic 

bemoge 

boge 

bote 

bdnbe 

bdte 

bliefe 

bltebe 

bltdje 

brtere 

bracbe 

brennte 

bradjte 

badjte 

bflnge 

(brafdje) 

brofebe 

brange 
burfte 

empfabjle 
empfotjle 

afje 

futjre 



Imper. 



beftety 



birg 
birft 



brid? 



brifeb. 



wanting 



Past Part. 



gcbmfcn 
befobfen 

begonnett 

gcbiffcit 
geborgett 

geborftett 

benj0rt.cn 

gebogen 

geboten 

gebunben 

gebeten 

gebtofen 

QcbXicbcn 

gebltrben 

gebraten 

gcbrorhen 

gebrannt 

gebvacht 

gcbarbt 

gebungen 

gcbroffben 



gebtungen 
gebmrft 

cmbfohlcn 

gegeffen 
gefabren 



1 Also weak except in past participle. 2 In other senses weak. * Has very 
rarely Pres. 2d and 3d Sing, beurfr, beut and Imper. Sing. beut. * Intransitive 
often, transitive always, weak. 6 Sometimes weak. 



STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 



175 



Infinitive. 



fatten, U fall 
fatten, 1 fold 
fattgett, catch 
fedjtett, tight 
-f ehictt, only in 
fittfcett, And 
fledjten, twine 
fleiftett, apply 
fltegett, (.<"-*?/ fly 
flteften, f., flee 
flieften, f. or b„ 
flow 

fragett, 1 ask 
freffett, eat 
frieren, freeze 
fliircit, ferment 
flctmren, bear 

neb en, give 
gcfcciljen, \., 

thrive 
H elicit, f., go 
geUngen, 3 f.> 

succeed 
geltett, be worth 

gettefett, \., 

recover 
flemefeen, enjoy 
geftfjeften, 3 f./ 

happen 
=geffen, ^«<y 
getoinnett, win 

flicfjcit, pour 
;gimtett, only 
gtetdjen, 4 

resemble 
a let ten, f., glide 
gttmmett, gleam 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



faajt, faat 



fangjt, f&nqt 
ftdjtefl, ficbt 
fcef chlctt and 



flicbtft, fl\d,t 



(fragfrfrdgt) 
f riff(ef)t, frifct 



gebterft, 
gebtert 
gibft, gibt 



giltft, gilt 



gefebtefyt 

in Ucrgcffeit, 



** bcgiitucn, 



Preterit 
Indie. 



fief 

fi«JJ 
fo«)t 

emfcfeftlett, 
fanb 
flotft 

flog 

(ftug) 
fraf? 
fcov 
gor 

ncbar 

gab 

nebieli 

at«g 

gclang 

gait 

gena§ 

genof? 
gefdjafi 

which see. 

gcnmmt 
oof* 

which see. 

altd) 

alitt 
gtomm 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



(fruge) 

trifle 

frore 

gore 

gebare 

gabe 
gcMebe 

gtnge 
geldnge 

galte 
golte 
gendfe 

genoffe 
gefdjabe 



geroclnne 
gemonne 
goffc 

gltcfye 

glitte 
glomme 



Imper. 



ftcbt 
see. 



fltcbt 



fn§ 



gebier 
gib 



gilt 



wanting 



Past Part. 



gefattett 
gefalten 
gefangen 
gefodjten 

gefunben 

geflorijtcit 

gefliffett 

geflogen 

flefloljen 

gcfloffcn 

gefragt 

gefteffen 

gefroren 

gegoren 

geboren 

gegeben 
acbicben 

gegmtgen 
geltutgett 

gegoltett 

genefett 

genoffen 
rtefdjehen 



gchumucn 
gegoffett 

flCflltrflCtt 

geglitten 
geglommen 



241 

249 
242 
246 

237 
246 
244 
246 
246 
246 

249 
239 
246 
246 
238 

239 
245 

242 
237 

238 
239 

246 
239 



238 

246 

244 

244 
246 



1 Generally weak throughout. 2 Very rarely forms in cu. See bieten. 3 Only 
ifl third person. 4 Transitive usually weak. 



176 



APPENDIX. 



Infinitive. 



geaben, dig 
greifen, seize 
habcn, have 
baltcn, hold 
hangett, hang 
haunt, hew 
beben, raise 

hetften, bid, call 
helfen, help 

fcifen, chide 
t emtett, know 
tiefen, 1 choose 
f lemmen, 2 press 
t Ueben, 3 cleave 
f ltmmcn, U 

climb 
f tina.cn, sound 

ftteifen, pinch. 
fttCi|JCtt, 4 pinch 
f ommcit, f./ come 

fbmtcn, can 

f riecften, creep. 
f iiren, choose. 
taken, load 
laffen, let 
laufen, f. or b., 

run 
leiben, suffer 
leiben, lend 
lefett, read 
licflcit, lie 
sltetCtt, only in 

:(ingen, only in 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



grabfr, grabt 



baft, b.at 
bdltfl, bait 
fydngfr, b,dngt 



bUffi, W 



(fommfi) 
(fommt) 
farm, fannft, 
fann 



Idbft, Idbt 
Idffeji lafjt 
Idufft, Iduft 



Hefejt, liefl 



berlteren, 
gelingen and 



Preterit 
Indie. 



grub 

B*if? 

vatic 

bielt 

bittg 

bieb 

bob 

imb 

W% 
half 

Kf? 
tannic 

flomm 

Hob 

flnmm 

Hang 

fniff 

tittup 

tarn 

lonntc 

tvoa) 

for 

lnt> 

Heft 

lief 

litt 

tiel) 

r*i 

lag 

which see. 
miftlhtgen, 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



griibe 

grtffe 

bdtte 

fytelie 

fytnge 

b,tebe 

bobe 

fyiibe 

b,te§e 

bdlfe 

baife 

fiffe 

fennte 

fofe 

flomme 

flobe 

flomme 

flange 

flunge 

fniffe 

fntppe 

fame 

fonnte 

frocbe 

fore 

lube 

Iiefje 

Iiefe 

Iitte 
lteb.e 
[aft 

Idge 



Imper. 



hilf 



wanting 



lies 



Past Part. 



gegraben 

gegriffen 

acbabt 

gcbaltcn 

gehangen 

gebauett 

gcboben 

gebetften 
gebolfen 

geftffen 

gefannt 

gefofen 

geflommen 

gefloben 

gcflommcn 

gcflungcn 

gefntffen 
gefnibben 

gefommen 

gefount 

gerrodjen 

geforen 

gclabcn 

gelaffen 

gelaufen 

gclittcu 
gclicben 
gclefcn 
gelegen 



1 Same word as fiircn, but less common. 2 Usually weak except in 
bet lemmctt. 3 Generally weak. * Often weak. • Very rarely forms in eu. 
See bieten. 



STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 



177 



Infinitive. 



lufcfjcit, 1 extin- 
guish 
litant, lie 
ttttl)len, 3 grind 

meiben, avoid 
melfen, 4 milk 
ttteffen, measure 
mtftlingen, 5 f/ 

fail 
mogen, may 

mitffen, must 

ttchmeu, take 

ttcnncn, name 
sttefett, only in 
stltC^Ctt, only in 
fcfeifett, whistle 
pflegett, 6 foster 

fcretfen, praise 
anellen, 1 \.or b., 

gush 
tatyen, 7 avenge 
taieit, advise 
mfcen, rub 
reiften, tear 
retten, f. *r b,., 

ride 
remteit, f. or \, 

run 
rietfjen, smell 
rtngen, wring 

rinnen, f. or b„ 

run 
mfett, call 



Present 

2d and 3d 
Sing. 



lifcbeft Iifdjt 



(mdblft, 
mablt) 



(mllffr, milft) 
miff(ef)t, mifjt 



mag, magft, 

mag 

mufj, mufjt, 

mufj 

nimmfr, 

ntmmt 



genefen, 
gemeften, 



quillfi, qiullt 



rdtft, rdt 



Preterit 
Indie. 



log 

<llllll)l> 

micb 
molf 

miftlang 

morf)tc 

ttttt^tC 

nalnn 
nannte 

which see. 
which see. 

fcflog 
(Uflafl) 
fcrteS 
quod 

(rod)) 

rict 

riefc 

rif? 

ritt 

tannic 

rod) 
rang 
rung 
rann 

ricf 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



Idfcbe 

loge 
(muble) 

mtebe 
molfe 
mafje 
melange 

mddjte 

miifjte 

ndbme 

nennte 



Pftffe 
pfloge 

prtefe 
quolle 

(rocbe) 
riete 
riebe 
riffe 

ritte 

rennte 

rocbe 

range 

riinge 

ranne 

ronnc 

rtefe 



Imper. 



lifd? 



(milf) 
mt§ 



wanting 



wanting] gemOfht 

gemnftt 

genommen 

genannt 



quill 



Past Part. 



gelofdjen 

gelogen 

gcmablcn 

gemteben 
gcmolfcn 
gemeffen 
miftlungen 



gefcfiffen 
gefcflogen 

gejiriefen 
geqnoHen 

gerodjen 
geraten 
geriefcen 
geriffen 
geritten 

gcrannt 

gcrorficn 
gerungen 

geronnen 

gernfen 



246 

246 
249 

245 
246 

239 
237 

250 

250 

238 

251 



244 
246 

245 
246 

249 
241 

245 
244 
244 



246 
237 

238 
243 



1 Transitive weak. 2 Very rarely forms in cu. See bieten. 3 Very seldom 
strong except in past participle. 4 Also weak. 6 Only in third person. 
• Usually weak. 7 Rarely strong except in past participle. 



i 7 8 



APPENDIX. 



Infinitive. 



f alsett, salt 

ffUtfett, drink 
fruiflcn, suck 
fdjaffett, 1 create 
f rf)rtlteu, sound 
sfctyeftett, only in 
fdjeiben, f., part 
frfKtitcit, shine 
jrrjcttcn, scold 

fdjeren, shear 
fdjteben, shove 
fdjiefeett, shoot 
fdjmbeti, flay 
fdilafen, sleep 
fd)lageit, strike 
frhlcirheit, f./ 

sneak 
fd|)letfeit, whet 
fctyletften, slit 
frhltcfcn, f., slip 
frfjltefteit, shut 
fdjltttgett, sling 
fdjmetfeeti, smite 
fctymeljeit, 3 \.. 

melt 
fchimuucn, snort 
frhueibcn, cut 
ffhmcbcn, snort 
jrhrauben, screw 
fetyrecfen, 4 f./ be 

afraid 
irhrcibcit, write 
irhreicn, scream 
frhreitett, f., 

stride 
frhwarcit, sup- 
purate 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



fauffl/ ffiuft 



gefcljefceit, 



fcbtltft, fcbilt 
fcbterft, fcbiert 



fcbiafft fcblaft 
fcbldgfr, fcblagt 



fdjmtl3ejr / 
fcbmity 



fcbrtcffi, fcbricft 



(fdjmierf}, 
fcbmierr) 



Preterit 
Indie. 



foff 

fog 
frfmf 

frfjoU 
which see. 
feftieb 

fdjten 

frf)Olt 

fdjor 

frf)Oi) 

f$** 

fdjtmb 

Wief 

fdjlufl 

fd)U$> 

fWft 

Woff 

f#l0fe 

f^Iang 

fdjmif? 

fthtioB 
ftfmtti 
frfmob 
fdjrofc 
fchtaf 

frfjriefc 

fchrie 

ftfrttt 

fcf)ltior 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



foffe 
foge 
febfife 
fdjotle 

fdjiebe 

febiene 

fcbalte 

fcbolte 

febore 

febobe 

feboffe 

fdjunbe 

fcbliefe 

fcbluge 

fcblidje 

f» 
WRffe 

fcbloffe 

fcbloffe 

fcblange 

febmiffe 

fdjmofoe 

fdjnobe 
febmrte 
febnobe 
febrobe 
febrdfe 

febriebe 

fdjrtec 

febritte 

febmore 



Imper. 



Wit 
febier 



fd?mil3 



febrief 



Past Part. 



gefalsett 

gefalftt 

gejoffett 

gefogen 

gcfrhaffcit 

gcfrfjoUcn 

gefcfiicbcn 
gcfchtcncn 
gcfrhoUctt 

gefdjorett 

gefrftoben 

gefthoffen 

gefdjunbett 

gefrhlafcn 

gestagen 

gcirhlidjcn 

gefdjltffen 

gefdjUffen 

gefdjloffett 

gefd)Ioffett 

gcffftlmtgcii 

gefdjmtffen 

gcfrhntol^cn 

gefrfmohen 
gefdjnittett 
gefthnoben 

flc|d)robcit 
gefthrotfeu 

gefdjriefceit 

gefrbrteen 

gefrhritren 

gcirtjtuorcit 



1 With other meanings usually weak. a Very rarely forms in eu. See bieten. 
* Transit. 7e usually weak. * Transitive weak. 



STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 



179 



Infinitive. 



fd^meidett, 1 be 

silent 
fdjtoeHett, 2 f., 

swell 
[rhmimmett, f. or 

\\., swim 
fdjwtubcn, f., 

vanish 

fdjUnngen, 

swing 
frfjttiprcttr swear 

feften, see 
fetn, I, be 
fenbett, 3 send 
fteben, 3 boil 
lingett, sing 
ftttlett, f./ sink 
ftnnett, think 

U<?en, sit 

iodeit, ought 
ffcaltew, split 

ffceien, spit 
fpimten, spin 

f£letf?en, split 
ffcrerfjen, speak 
f$mef?ett, U 

sprout 
fprittgeit, f. or\., 

spring 
fredjen, stick 

fterfen, 5 stick 
fteftett, stand 

ftchicn, steal 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



fcbwillfi 
fcbruillt 



fleb.fr, ftcbt 
bin, btft, ift 



foil, foCft, foU 



fpncbfr, fprtcbt 



fHdjfr, flidjt 
fttcffr, jiicft 



fHetjIft jHetjIt 



Preterit 
Indie. 



fd))t)(TtUlU 

fd)tuumut 
fd)Umnt> 
fdiftmnb 
jrhhmna. 

frhiunr 

jdjumv 

faf> 

lunr 

fattbte 

fott 

fang 

fan! 

famt 

fottte 



We 
fpamt 

&m 

farad) 

ffctang 
ftatfj 

fial 
ftcmb 
fttmb 
ftafit 



Preterit 
Sub junc. 



febanege 
fcbrrolle 



fptee 

fpdnrte 

fportne 

fpliffe 

fprdd]C 

fproffe 

fprdnge 

flacfye 

fiafe 

frdnbe 

ftunbe 

ftatjle 

flotjle 



Imper. 



fcbmtil 



fteb. 
fet 



wanting 



fpricb 



1ticb 
tfid 5 



ftieb.1 



Past Part. 



gefrfitutcgcii 
gefdjtooHen 

a,cfrf)h)om= 

men 
gefdjfemtts 

ben 
gefd)ftmn= 

flCtt 

aefdjtutfvett 

flCfcl)Ctt 

getoefen 

gefanbt 

gefortett 

gefmtgen 

gefmtfett 

gefonnett 

gefeffett 

gefollt 

geffcaltett 

gefjmitet 

gefbieen 

getyomten 

geffcUffeit 

acflu'orfjcn 

getyroffen 

gefprungett 

geftorheu 

geftocfett 
geftanbett 

geftoljlen 



246 

238 

237 

237 

246 

239 
248 

251 
246 
237 
237 
238 

239 
250 
249 

245 
238 

244 
238 
246 

237 
238 

249 
240 



1 Transitive occasionally weak. ■ Transitive weak, 
rarely forms in eu. See bieren. 6 Usually weak. 



3 Also weak. 



I Very 



i8o 



APPENDIX. 



Infinitive. 



ftetgett, f. or %, 
' mount 
ftetbett, f./ die 

ftiebcit, disperse 
ftittfcn, stink 

ftofeeu, push 
ftrcirhctt, stroke 
fttetten, contend 
tragen, carry 
treffett, hit 
treiben, drive 
tretett, tread 
triefen, drip 
rrtnf ctt, drink 

truo.cu, deceive 
tun, do 
berberben, 2 f., 

spoil 
betbrteftett, vex 
bergeffen, forget 

berlieren, lose 
hmchfcit, f./ grow 

tomgett, weigh 
ttmfdjen, wash 

iucben, weave 
stoegen, w^ m» 
toeichett, f., yield 
toeifett, show 
toenben, 3 turn 
toerbett, sue 

tucrben, f., 

become 
toctfen, throw 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



fttrbji, fitrbt 



ftofceft, ftofjt 



trdgft, tragt 
trifffr, trifft 



trittft, tritt 



tuft, tut 

perbtrbfr, 

oerbtrbt 



Dergiff(ef)r, 
pergifjt 



madjfeji, 
madjfr 



tr>afd}efi, 
mafdjt 



behjenen, 



urirbft, mtrbt 
rotrft, nrirb 
ujtrfft, mlrft 



Preterit 
Indie. 



ftiefl 

ftarb 

ftob 

ftanf 

ftunf 

ftrtd) 

fttitt 

trug 

traf 

trteb 

trat 

troff 

ttant 

tvunl 

trog 

m 

berbarb 

berbroft 
bergaf? 

berlo* 

hntrf)* 

inog 
nmfrfa 

hiob 

which see. 

lutrh 

toteS 

nmitbtc 

hmrb 

toatb 

umrbc 
hmrf 



Preterii 
Subjunc. 



fitege 

fidrbe 

fttirbe 

ftobe 

ftdnfe 

fiunfc 

ftte^e 

ftrtdjc 

ftritte 

triige 

trafe 

tricbe 

trdtc 

troffe 

tranfe 

triinfe 

troge 

tdte 

Derbarbe 

uerburbe 

uerbroffe 

uergafje 

perldre 
muebfe 

moge 
mtifdje 

mobc 

mtdje 

miefe 

voenbete 

mflrbe 

trmrbe 

mfirbe 

mdrfe 
marfe 



Imper. 



fttrb 



triff 



tritt 



perbtrb 



n?irb 



mtrf 



Past Part. 



geftiegen 

gcftorbcn 

geftobett 

gcftmtfcit 

geftobett 

gcftridicn 

gefrritten 

gerragen 

getroffett 

getrteben 

getretett 

getroffen 

getrtmfen 

getrogen 
getan 

bevborben 

berbroffen 
bergeffen 

berlorctt 
gettmcbfeti 

getoogett 
getomfrhett 

getoobett 

gcmiriicit 
gettuefen 
aenmnbi 
gefrorbett 

gciuorbcit 

geiuorfejt 



1 Very rarely forms in eu. See bitten. * Transitive weak. 3 Also weak. 



STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 



181 



Infinitive. 



tvicflcit, weigh 
nnufccn, wind 
wimtcn, only in 
Wivvctt, confuse, 
ttliffett, know 

wo licit, will 

.^ci lien, accuse 
bitten, draw 
^iUiltflCH, force 



Present 

2d and 3d 

Sing. 



nctutiutcn, 

cf. § 249. 

t»ei§, tuetfjt, 

tnetfj 

toill, unlift, 

mill 



Preterit 
Indie. 



want* 

which see. 

hmftte 

tuolltc 

jttmna 



Preterit 
Subjunc. 



tt»oge 
n?dnbe 



trmfjte 

tr>olItc 

3tel)c 
30ge 
3tx>ange 



Imper. 



Past Part. 



ncluoncu 
gettmnfeen 



flehmftt 

nctuoiit 

flcjonen 

nc^ttmnflctt 



246 
237 



251 

250 

2 45 
246 
237 



Very rarely forms in eu. See bieten. 



INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. 



252. The effect of the inseparable prefixes upon the 
meaning of words can not always be traced, but the fol- 
lowing statement may be of assistance : — 

93e (English be) is related to bet. It makes intransi- 
tive verbs transitive and usually changes the meaning 
or application of transitives. Thus : betoofjttett, to oc- 
cupy, 6efc£)ret6en r to describe. It also makes transitive 
verbs from nouns and adjectives and then means to pro- 
vide with, make. Thus : befreunben, to befriend, befreten, 
to free. 

(Sttt usually signifies separation or deprivation. Thus : 
entgcfyen, to escape, entfagen, to renounce. It becomes 
emp in empfattgen, emipfefjfot, empfmben. 

(£r often signifies getting or passing into a condition, 
or obtaining by the action of the verb. Thus : erbfoffen, 
to grow pale, er jagen, to get by hunting. 

@e seems often to have no effect on the meaning of 



1 82 APPENDIX. 

the verb, and at other times has such various significa- 
tions that it is not further noticed here. 

95er signifies forth, for. It may mean a complete 
carrying out of the idea of the verb, or it may convey 
the idea of loss, perversion, privation. Thus: berfpredjen, 
to promise, fcerfetmen, to mistake. 

3er signifies to pieces, dissolution, apart, asunder. 
Thus: jerretf^en, to tear to pieces, gergltebern, to dis- 
member. 

SUMMARIES OF RULES FOR THE ORDER 
OF WORDS. 

253. The following summaries give the usual posi- 
tion of the different elements of the sentence in each 
of the three word-orders. Details have been given in 
§§87, 220-225, and illustrative sentences may be found 
in any of the German Exercises. It should be observed 
that these three word-orders differ essentially only in 
the position of the personal verb. 

a. Normal Order (cf. § 102). Subject, Personal Verb, 
1. Pronoun object, 2. Adverb of time, 3. Noun objects, 
4. Other adverbs, 5. Negation, 6. Predicate adjective 
or noun, 7. Separable prefix, 8. Remainder of verb. 

b. Inverted Order (cf. § 102). Inverting element (ii 
any), Personal Verb, Subject, the other elements as in 
the Normal Order. 

c. Transposed Order (cf. § 146). .Connective, Sub- 
ject, the other elements as in the Normal Order, Personal 
Verb. 



DERIVATION. 1 83 

Note. — While principal clauses may have either the normal or 
the inverted order, subordinate clauses can have only the trans- 
posed, except as provided for in § 222. 

DERIVATION OF VERBS, NOUNS, AND 
ADJECTIVES. 

254. Derivation is the process of forming words from 
other words by the aid of prefixes, suffixes, or internal 
change of vowels and consonants. Two or more of 
these agencies may act together, although they are 
treated separately in the following paragraphs. The 
derivation of verbs, nouns, and adjectives is treated 
briefly here. There are, of course, words which do not 
come from other words by derivation or composition. 
These are called primitive words and are regularly mon- 
osyllables. 

VERBS. 

255. Verbs are derived : — 

a. From other verbs by a change of the vowel of the 
root, or by a change of the final consonant, with or 
without vowel-change. Thus : fallen, to fell, tegen, to 
lay from fallen and liegen (these are called causative 
verbs) ; bitcfen, to bend, from Megert, to bow. 

b. From nouns, usually without, and from adjectives, 
usually with vowel-change. Thus: fatteltt, to saddle, 
totert, to kill. Occasionally verbs are derived from other 
parts of speech in the same way. 

c. By the inseparable prefixes. See § 253. 



1 84 APPENDIX. 

d. By suffixes such as eln, ent, ierett r etc. Thus: 
(adjeln, to smiley flcuppertt, to rattle, ftubierett, to study. 

NOUNS. 

256. Nouns are derived : — 

a. From verbs by vowel-change, sometimes with a 
change of the final consonant, and also by the suffixes 
te, be, t, b, e. Thus : gtufe, river, from flieffen ; ©prctdje, 
language, from fpredjen. 

b. Rarely from adjectives without a suffix. Thus : 
Gk&Xt, green from the adjective grim. But see also § 145. 

c. By the suffixes d)en, e, et, el f er, en f l)ett, in, fett, tetn, 
ling, ttUf, fat, fet, fdjaft, turn, ung, etc. Thus : ©ute, good- 
ness, @ottt)ett, godhead. Some of these can be added 
only to one part of speech, others to two or more parts. 

d. By the prefixes ge, mtft, un, er, erj, ant. Thus: 
©emalbe, painting, Unredjt, wrong. 

ADJECTIVES. 

257. Adjectives are derived : — 

a. Rarely from verbs by vowel-change merely. 
Thus : bracJ), fallow, from bredjen. 

b. By the suffixes bar, en, er, em, f)aft, td)t, ig, tfd), lei, 
ltd), jam, t, etc. Thus ; epar, eatable, golben, golden. 

c. By the prefixes be, erj, ge, mt^, un, ur. Thus : be* 
rett, ready, getreu, faithful. 

COMPOSITION OF VERBS, NOUNS, AND ADJECTIVES. 

258. Composition is the putting together of two or 
more independent words, each with its own meaning, to 



GRIMM'S LAW. Io$ 

make a new word. Derivation by prefixes and suffixes 
is really not essentially different from composition, as 
prefixes and suffixes were originally independent words 
which have now lost their independent meaning and use 
and are employed solely as parts of other words. In 
some cases a question may arise whether a particular 
word is really derived or compounded. For example, 
verb? formed from other verbs by the inseparable pre- 
fixes are usually called compounds, but may be as well 
considered derivatives. 

259. In compound verbs, nouns, and adjectives, the 
last component is regularly a verb, noun, or adjective 
respectively. The preceding component or components 
may be any part of speech. Thus : ctufftefjert, to stand 
up, (Sbetftettt, precious stone, et^fctlt, ice-cold. 

Note. — German makes its words to such an unusual extent 
from other words of the language, that one of the easiest means of 
acquiring a large vocabulary is to watch closely the stems of words. 
The usefulness of this habit cannot be insisted upon too much. 
Frequently the knowledge of the meaning of a single stem will make 
clear the meaning of a large number of other words based on that 
stem. The habit of fixing the stem of a word at its first occurrence 
will save much examination of the dictionary and greatly facilitate 
progress in acquiring the language. 

GRIMM'S LAW. 

260. This law, named after its expounder, has to do with the 
progression or rotation of mutes. It has been discovered that the 
mutes have moved forward one step from the original in most of the 
Germanic languages (English, Low-German, Scandinavian, etc.) 
and two steps in modern High-German. Thus, in the table 



1 86 APPENDIX. 

SURD. ASPIRATE. SONANT. 

lingual / dh, or th d 

labial p bh, or ph b 

palatal k gh, or kh g 

Original / should become theoretically English th (dfr) and German 
b ; original th (dh) , English d, German t ; and so on through the 
series. 

This would require : — 

English /, th, d — p, ph, b — k, kh, g to be 
German % b, t— p\ b, p — flj, g, I 

261. This is the theory. Actually there are many 
exceptions, especially in the labial and palatal series. 
German often has f and i) instead of pt) and ft), and f or 
j instead of tt), as required by the table. Arbitrary 
changes in spelling also add to the confusion, Reading 
the table backwards, so as to place German first, and 
allowing for many regular variations, we get as a table 
of the actual correspondences, though still with many 
exceptions, the following : — 

German b, f (3), t— b, f, p — g, dj, f. 

English th, t, d — / {y),p y b — g (y, w) , k (gh,y) , ch. 

Thus : bct3, that, ttcf , deep ; fjdlh, half, reif, ripe, ©top- 
pel, stubble ; %a§, day, ®afe, cheese t $8uti) t book. 

Note. — The subject will not be further treated here. The stu- 
dent will be able to find illustrative words in abundance. Care 
must be taken not to let the etymology of words mislead with regard 
to their meaning, as words etymologically the same may not have 
the same shades of meaning. 



SYNTAX. 187 

SYNTAX. 

262. In addition to the rules and numerous practical 
illustrations given in the exercises, a brief statement of 
the more important of the remaining rules of syntax is 
here given. 

DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

263. The definite article is occasionally omitted 
where it would be expressed in English, but is much 
oftener inserted where it would be omitted in English. 
For example, it is used with abstract nouns, names of 
seasons, months, and days, before nouns when taken in 
their most comprehensive sense, etc. Thus : bte %\X* 
genb, virtue, ber SJJorjember, November, bct£ ©olb, gold. 

GENITIVE. 

264. The genitive dependent upon a noun may ex- 
press possession, material, origin, characteristic, or be a 
partitive, subjective or objective genitive. These have 
been abundantly illustrated in the exercises. It may also 
be used with other parts of speech : — 

a. With adjectives, chiefly corresponding to those 
which are followed by of in English. Thus : be3 ©in- 
gen£ miibe, tired of singing. 

b. With about twenty prepositions. See § 214. 

c. With verbs, 1. As a remoter object along with the 
direct object. Thus : Sttcm t)at mid) mcmdje£ SafterS cm- 
geffagt, I have been accused of many a crime. 2. With 
some reflexives and impersonals. Thus : %$) ertmtete 



1 88 APPENDIX. 

mid) jebe£ Umftctttb3, / remember every circumstance. 3. 
As the only object of certain verbs, corresponding to 
the direct object in English. Thus : £ctf$ mid) ber neuen 
2?retf)ett geniefcett, let me enjoy the new freedom. 

d. In a few other constructions which need not to be 
further noted here. 

DATIVE. 

265. The dative is commonly the indirect object of a 
verb, as has been frequently illustrated in the exercises. 
It stands, however, in other constructions : — 

a. As the so-called dative privative. This is really 
only an indirect object. The corresponding verb is 
usually followed by from in English. Thus: Die ©pttj* 
fmben fjabett mir aHe3 genommen, the rascals have taken 
everything from me. 

b. As the sole object of certain verbs, some of which 
are transitive in English. Thus: (Sr folgte mir, he fol- 
lowed me. Sometimes the dative in such constructions 
is due to the prepositional force of the prefixes ent, ab, 
art, cmf, au3, etc. Thus : @r entging bem geittb burdj bte 
$ludjt r he escaped the enemy by flight. 

c. Dependent upon verbs in a looser and more re- 
mote relation, known as the dative of interest, ethical 
dative, etc. Thus : ©djretben @te mir btefen Skief ab, copy 
this letter for me. 

d. To denote the possessor. This is really the same 
ais the preceding. Thus : Wxt blutet ba$ §erj, my heart 
bleeds. Commonly the definite article is used with the 



SYNTAX. 189 

noun in this construction, but occasionally the posses- 
sive is employed. 

e. With certain adjectives, commonly such as are fol- 
lowed by to in English. Thus : 2)er $ctifer toar mir gnfc 
big, the emperor was gracious to me. 

f. With about twenty prepositions. See § 214. 

g. Occasionally in other constructions not noted here. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

266. Besides its common use as the direct object of a 
verb, the accusative is employed in other constructions : 

a. The verbs leljren, Ijeifeen, fdjtmpfen, fd)elten, tcmfett, 
and occasionally a few others, govern two accusatives. 
Thus : (£r lefjrte mid) bie ©rammatif , he taught me gram- 
mar. 

b. With a few adjectives. Thus : id) fritt e3 jttfrieben, 
/ am satisfied (with it). 

c. With certain prepositions. See § 214. 

d. As an adverbial accusative to express measure, 
extent, time y answering to the questions how much ? how 
far? how long? This has been illustrated in the accusa- 
tive of time (cf.. § 226) ; other illustrations are, ba3 
loftet firnf £ater, that costs five Talers, toir gingen bie 
^reppe fjinunter, we went down stairs. 



1 90 APPENDIX. 

SUMMARY. 

The following summary of subjects treated in the preceding 
pages will perhaps meet satisfactorily all the purposes of an index 
and also be of assistance in reviewing systematically the facts of the 
grammar. References are- to paragraphs. The vocabulary takes 
the place of a word index. 

ALPHABET. 

Print, 1-3; script, 228; capitals, 4; new ortho- 
graphy, 5. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Vowels, 6-12; modified vowels (umlauts), 13—16; 
diphthongs, 17— 22 ; consonants, 23-34; consonantal di- 
graphs and trigraphs, 35—46; doubled vowels and con- 
sonants, 47 ; accent, 48 ; division into syllables, 49. 

ARTICLES AND WORDS DECLINED LIKE THEM. 

2)er, 54, 66 y in, 125 ; em, 62, 140; biefer, jener, etc., 
58—60, 126, 196; fein, 63; possessive adjectives, 64- 
66 f 84. 

NOUNS. 

General remarks, 50-53, 95, 96; strong nouns, class 
I., 97-101, 229, 233; class II., 103-109, 230; class 
III., 112-115, 231; weak nouns, 1 19-122, 232; with 
defective stem, 233 ; mixed declension, 234; compound 
nouns, 123; compounds in TtartXi, 129; foreign nouns, 
130; proper names, 1 31-134; nouns of weight and 
measure, 135, 136; genitive and accusative of time, 
226; adverbial genitive, 227. 



SUMMARY. 191 

ADJECTIVES. 

When declined, 137; strong, 138-139; weak, 141- 
145; mixed, 147-148; comparison, 153-159; indefi- 
nites, 182-183, 196. 

NUMERALS. 

Cardinals, 140; ordinals, 151; fractionals, 160; 
counting time, 161 ; day of the month, 173. 

PRONOUNS. 

Personals, idj, 83, bit, 86, 57, er, fie, e8 # 93-94; pos- 
sessives, 198; demonstratives, 60, 125, 126, 197; in- 
terrogatives, 116-118; relatives, 149—150, 184; indef- 
inites, 182, 183, 196; too and bet for pronouns, 118. 

VERBS. 

§ctbett, 61, 67, 80, 162-163, 235, d; feitt, 56, 6y y 85, 
174,235, e\ toerben, 79, 89, 175, 235,/; weak verbs, 
71-74; tenses with fjctbett, 81-82; tenses with feitt, 90- 
92; subjunctive, 169-170, 176; uses of subjunctive, 
164—166, 171— 172, 177; conditional, 167; synopses of 
verbal forms, 235; strong verbs, 75-78, 236-252; 
verbs in ietett, ettt, em, 178; irregular weak verbs, 179, 
251; passive voice, 199—203; inseparables, 180— 181 ; 
inseparable prefixes, 252; separables, 185-189; pre- 
fixes, separable or inseparable, 188-189; reflexives, 
190-193; impersonals, 195; modal auxiliaries, 205- 
207, 250; laffett, 209; infinitive without JU, 208; per* 
feet and present, 204; e£ ift, e3 gibt, 152. 



I9 2 APPENDIX. 

INDECLINABLES. 

Adverbs, 210-213; prepositions, 214—215, no; 
conjunctions, 216-219. 

ORDER OF WORDS. 

87-88, 102, I46, 168, 220-225, 253. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

Derivation, 254; verbs, 255; nouns, 256; adjectives, 
257; composition, 258; verbs, nouns, adjectives, 259; 
Grimm's law, 260—261. 

SYNTAX. 

Definite article, 263; cases, gender, number, 51-53; 
genitive, 264, adverbial, 227, weight and measure, 136; 
dative, 265: accusative, 266; nouns of weight and 
measure, 136; counting time, 161 ; day of the month, 

173. 

Perfect and present, 204; uses of subjunctive, 164- 
166,171-172,177; conditional, 167 ; modal auxiliaries 
205-207 ; laffert, 209 ; infinitive without ju, 208, 



Ifoeatb's /iDo&ern language Series 

GERMAN GRAMMARS AND READERS. 

Alternative Exercises. For the Joynes-Meissner. 54 pages. 15 cts. 
Ball's German Drill Book. Companion to any grammar. 80 cts. 
Ball's German Grammar. 90 cts. 
Boisen's German Prose Reader. 90 cts. 
Deutsches Liederbuch. "With music. 166 pages. 75 cts. 
Deutsch's Colloquial German Reader. 90 cts. 
Foster's Geschichten und Marchen. For young children. 25 cts. 
Fraser and Van der Smissen's German Grammar. $1.10. 
Gore's German Science Reader. 75 cts. 
Guerber's Marchen und Erzahlungen, I. 162 pages. 60 cts. 
Guerber's Marchen und Erzahlungen, II. 202 pages. 65 cts. 
Harris's German Composition. 50 cts. 
Harris's German Lessons. 60 cts. 
Hastings' Studies in German Words. $1.00. 

Hatfield's Materials for German Composition. Based on Immensee and on 
Hoher als die Kirche. Paper. 33 pages. Each, 12 cts. 

Heath's German Dictionary. Retail price, $1.50. 

Horning's Materials. Based on Der Schiviegersohn. 16 pages. 5 cts. 

Huss's German Reader. 70 cts. 

Joynes-Meissner German Grammar. $1.15. 

Joynes's Shorter German Grammar. Part I of the above. 80 cts. 

Joynes's Shorter German Reader. 60 cts. 

Joynes and Wesselhoeft's German Grammar. $1.15. 

Kriiger and Smith's Conversation Book. 40 pages. 25 cts. 

Meissner's German Conversation. 65 cts. 

Mosher and Jenney's Lern- und Lesebuch. $1.25. 

Nix's Erstes deutsches Schulbuch. For primary classes. Illus. 202 pp. 35 cts. 

Pattou's An American in Germany. A conversation book. 70 cts. 

Sheldon's Short German Grammar. 60 cts. 

Spanhoofd's Elementarbuch der deutschen Sprache. $1.00. 

Spanhoofd's Erstes Deutsches Lesebuch. 70 cts. 

Spanhoofd's Lehrbuch der deutschen Sprache. $1.00. 

Stiiven's Praktische Anfangsgriinde. Cloth. 203 pages. 70 cts. 

Wallentin's Grundziige der Naturlehre (Palmer). $1.00. 

Wesselhoeft's Elementary German Grammar. 90 cts. 

Wesselhoeft's Exercises. Conversation and composition. 50 cts. 

Wesselhoeft's German Composition. 45 cts. 



Ibeatb's fl&o&ern Xanguage Series 

ELEMENTARY GERMAN TEXTS. (Partial List.) 

Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Andersen's Marchen (Super). Vocabulary. 50 cts. 

Baumbach's Nicotiana (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Baumbach's Waldnovellen (Bernhardt). Six stories. Vocabulary. 35 cts. 

Benedix's Der Prozess (Wells). Vocabulary. 20 cts. 

Benedix's Nein (Spanhoofd). Vocabulary and exercises. 25 cts. 

Bluthgen's Das Peterle von Nurnberg (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. 

Bolt's Peterli am Lift (Betz). Vocabulary and exercises. 40 cts. 

Campe's Robinson der Jungere (Ibershoff) . Vocabulary. 40 cts. 

Carmen Sylva's Aus meinem Konigreich (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. 

Die Schildburger (Betz). Vocabulary and exercises. 35 cts. 

Der Weg zum Gluck (Bernhardt). Vocabulary and exercises. 40 cts. 

Deutscher Humor aus vier Jahrhunderten (Betz). Vocab. and exercises. 40 cts. 

Elz's Er ist nicht eif ersiichtig (Wells). Vocabulary. 20 cts. 

Gerstacker's Germelshausen (Lewis). Vocabulary and exercises. 30 cts. 

Goethe's Das Marchen (Eggert). Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Grimm's Marchen and Schiller's Der Taucher (Van der Smissen). 45 cts. 

Hauff 's Das kalte Herz (Van der Smissen) . Vocab. Roman type. 40 cts. 

Hauff's Der Zwerg Nase. No notes. 15 cts. 

Heyse's L'Arrabbiata (Bernhardt). Vocabulary and exercises. 25 cts. 

Heyse's Niels mit der offenen Hand (Joynes). Vocab. and exercises. 30 cts. 

Leander's Traumereien (Van der Smissen) . Vocabulary. 40 cts. 

Munchhausen : Reisen und Abenteuer (Schmidt) . Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Rosegger's Der Lex von Gutenhag (Morgan). Vocab. and exercises. 40 cts. 

Salomon's Die Geschichte einer Geige (Tombo). Vocab. and exercises. 25 cts. 

Schiller's Der Neffe als Onkel (Beresford- Webb). Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Spyri's Moni der Geissbub (Guerber). Vocabulary. 25 cts. 

Spyri's Rosenresli (Boll). Vocabulary. 25 cts. 

Spyri's Was der Grossmutter Lehre bewirkt (Barrows). Vocabulary. 25 cts. 

Storm's Geschichten aus der Tonne (Vogel). Vocabulary. 40 cts. 

Storm's Immensee (Bernhardt). Vocabulary and exercises. 30 cts. 

Storm's In St. Jtirgen (Wright) . Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Storm's Pole Poppenspaler (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. 

Till Eulenspiegel (Betz). Vocabulary and exercises. 30 cts. 

Volkmann's Kleine Geschichten (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. 

Von Hillern's Hbher als die Kirche (Clary) . Vocabulary and exercises. 30 cts. 

Zschokke's Der zerbrochene Krug (Joynes). Vocabulary and exercises. 25 cts. 



14 DAY USE 

RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 

LOAN DEPT. 

This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 

on the date to which renewed. 

Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 



J M23'64-3PM~ 

































— — — _ 










LD 21A-60m-4,'64 TT General Library 
(E4555sl0)476B University of California 

Berkeley 


fjtfssigsEMt 


LD 21-2m-l,'33 (52m) 



V 







M 



UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 



